HP CLJ m751 m856 E75245 E85055 MFP m776 Service Manual

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M751, M856
HP Color LaserJet Managed E75245, E85055

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M776
Service Manual: Troubleshooting
www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet www.hp.com/support/colorljM856
www.hp.com/support/colorljM751 www.hp.com/support/colorljE75245
www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP www.hp.com/support/colorljE85055
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M751, M856,
Managed E75245, E85055, and Enterprise
MFP M776 - Service Manual: Troubleshooting
Copyright and License Trademark Credits
© Copyright 2019 HP Development Company, Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®, and

L.P. PostScript® are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without
prior written permission is prohibited, except as Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and
allowed under the copyright laws. Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation.
The information contained herein is subject to
change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not
be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Edition 2, 11/2019
Revision history
View a list of document revisions.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing
herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial
errors or omissions contained herein.
Table -1 Revision history

Revision number Revision date Revision notes
2 11/2019 Added the Solve fax or email problems chapter.
● Solve fax or email problems on page 408
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Firmware upgradeschapter.
● Firmware upgrades on page 402
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Service mode functionschapter.
● Service mode functions on page 382
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Internal test and information
pageschapter.
● Internal test and information pages on page 254
2 11/2019 Added additional cross-section and circuit diagrams for the M856, E85055, and
M776 models in the Diagrams chapter.
● Diagrams on page 204
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Component tests chapter.
● Component tests on page 202
2 11/2019 Added the Print/stop test chapter.
● Print/stop test on page 201
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Paper path and sensor diagnostic
tests chapter.
● Paper path and sensor diagnostic tests on page 195
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen control panel diagnostic information in the Control panel
checks chapter.
● Control panel checks on page 159
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Pre-boot menu options chapter.
● Pre-boot menu options on page 128
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Print the event log chapter.
● Print the event log on page 125
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Print the Settings menu map chapter.
● Print the Settings menu map on page 123
ENWW iii
Table -1 Revision history (continued)
2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Use the solve problems checklist
chapter.
● Use the solve problems checklist on page 119
2 11/2019 Updated and added content in the Paper path jam sensor locations chapter for
the M856, E85055, and M776 models.
● Paper path jam sensor locations on page 333
2 11/2019 Updated and added content in the Open the service menu chapter for the M856,
E85055, and M776 models.
● Open the service menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)

on page 382
2 11/2019 Updated and added content in the Clear paper jams chapter for the M856,
E85055, and M776 models.
● Clear paper jams in the document feeder - 31.13.yz (M776) on page 338
● Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1) on page 340
● Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) on page 343
● Clear jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF) on page 348
● Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1) on page 352
● Clear jams in the duplex area (13.D3) on page 353
● Clear paper jams in the 550-sheet paper tray (13.A3, 13.A4) on page 356
● Clear paper jams in the 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand (13.A4, 13.A5)
on page 362
● Clear paper jams in the 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand (13.A3, 13.A4,
13.A5, 13.A7) on page 368
2 11/2019 Added Document feeder system and Scanning and image capture system
sections for the M776 models.
● Document feeder system (M776) on page 108
● Scanning and image capture system (M776) on page 114
2 11/2019 Added the Inline finisher section for the M776zs model.
● Inner finisher on page 102
2 11/2019 Added content in the Paper trays chapter for the M856, E85055, and M776
models
● Feed speed control on page 69
● Jam detection on page 71
iv Revision history ENWW

Table -1 Revision history (continued)
2 11/2019 Reorganized and added content in the Paper handling system chapter for the
M856, E85055, and M776 models.
● Paper handling functional blocks on page 52
● Photo sensors and switches on page 58
● Motors, clutches, and solenoids on page 62
2 11/2019 Added content in the Engine-control system chapter for the M856, E85055, and
M776 models.
● Engine-control system on page 10
● DC controller on page 11
● Motors on page 13
● Fans on page 16
● Solenoids on page 17
● Clutches on page 17
● Switches on page 17
● Photointerrupter sensors on page 18
● Sensors on page 19
● LEDs on page 20
1 5/2019 HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M751 and HP Color LaserJet Managed E75245
Troubleshooting Manual initial release.
ENWW v
vi Revision history ENWW
Table of contents
1 Theory of operations ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1

Conventions used in this guide ............................................................................................................................................... 1
HP service and support ........................................................................................................................................................... 1
Basic operation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Sequence of operation ........................................................................................................................................ 3
Formatter-control system ...................................................................................................................................................... 6
Sleep mode ........................................................................................................................................................... 6
Printer job language (PJL) ................................................................................................................................... 7
Printer management language (PML) .............................................................................................................. 7
Control panel ........................................................................................................................................................ 8
Easy-access USB port ......................................................................................................................................... 8
CPU ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Input/output (I/O) ................................................................................................................................................. 8
Memory ................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Engine-control system .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
DC controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 11
Low-voltage power supply .............................................................................................................................. 21
High-voltage power supply ............................................................................................................................. 25
Fuser control ...................................................................................................................................................... 28
Engine laser scanner system ............................................................................................................................................... 33
Laser scanner failure detection ....................................................................................................................... 34
Safety .................................................................................................................................................................. 34
Image-formation process ................................................................................................................................ 35
Toner cartridges ................................................................................................................................................. 45
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit ............................................................................................................... 50
Paper handling system ......................................................................................................................................................... 52
Paper handling functional blocks .................................................................................................................... 52
Photo sensors and switches ............................................................................................................................ 58
Motors, clutches, and solenoids ...................................................................................................................... 62
Paper trays ......................................................................................................................................................... 68
Input accessories .................................................................................................................................................................... 79
550-sheet paper tray ....................................................................................................................................... 80
ENWW vii
2x550-sheet paper tray ................................................................................................................................... 85
HCI paper tray ..................................................................................................................................................... 93
Output accessories .............................................................................................................................................................. 101
Inner finisher .................................................................................................................................................... 102
Document feeder system (M776) ..................................................................................................................................... 108
Document feed system .................................................................................................................................. 109
Scanning and image capture system (M776) ................................................................................................................. 114
2 Solve problems ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 117

HP service and support ....................................................................................................................................................... 117
Solve problems checklist .................................................................................................................................................... 119
Use the solve problems checklist ................................................................................................................. 119
Print the Settings menu map ........................................................................................................................ 123
Print the current settings page ..................................................................................................................... 124
Print the event log ........................................................................................................................................... 125
Pre-boot menu options .................................................................................................................................. 128
Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................................................... 150
Determine the problem source .................................................................................................................... 151
Power subsystem ........................................................................................................................................... 154
Control panel checks ...................................................................................................................................... 159
Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................... 185
Individual component diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 186
Diagrams .......................................................................................................................................................... 204
Internal test and information pages ............................................................................................................ 254
Control panel menus ...................................................................................................................................... 259
Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview ......................................................... 291
Resolve print-quality problems ......................................................................................................................................... 297
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 297
Resolve print-quality problems .................................................................................................................... 298
Print quality troubleshooting guide .................................................................................................................................. 315
Repetitive image defect ruler ........................................................................................................................ 316
Clean the printer .................................................................................................................................................................. 320
Clean the paper path ...................................................................................................................................... 320
Print a cleaning page ...................................................................................................................................... 320
Enable and configure auto cleaning ............................................................................................................. 320
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges .......................................................................................... 321
Solve paper handling problems ........................................................................................................................................ 323
Printer feeds incorrect page size .................................................................................................................. 323
Printer pulls from incorrect tray ................................................................................................................... 323
Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly .......................................................................................... 324
Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X ............................................................................................................. 324
viii ENWW
Output is curled or wrinkled .......................................................................................................................... 324
Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds ................................................................................................ 326
Inner finisher adjustments (M776zs only) .................................................................................................. 328
Clear paper jams .................................................................................................................................................................. 333
Paper path jam sensor locations .................................................................................................................. 333
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams ..................................................................................................... 338
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? ....................................................................................... 338
Clear paper jams in the document feeder - 31.13.yz (M776) ................................................................. 338
Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1) ............................................................................................................... 340
Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) ............................................................................................................... 343
Clear jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF) ............................................................................................. 348
Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1) ................................................................................................. 352
Clear jams in the duplex area (13.D3) ......................................................................................................... 353
Clear paper jams in the 550-sheet paper tray (13.A3, 13.A4) ................................................................ 356
Clear paper jams in the 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand (13.A4, 13.A5) ......................................... 362
Clear paper jams in the 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5, 13.A7) .......... 368
Change jam recovery from the control panel ............................................................................................. 374
Solve performance problems ............................................................................................................................................ 376
Factors affecting print performance ............................................................................................................ 376
Print speeds ..................................................................................................................................................... 377
The printer does not print .............................................................................................................................. 378
The printer prints slowly ................................................................................................................................ 378
Solve connectivity problems .............................................................................................................................................. 379
Solve USB connection problems ................................................................................................................... 379
Solve wired network problems ..................................................................................................................... 380
Service mode functions ...................................................................................................................................................... 382
Open the service menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245) ..................................................... 382
Open the service menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776) ............................ 382
Service menu items ........................................................................................................................................ 382
Printer resets ................................................................................................................................................... 387
Format Disk and Partial Clean functions ..................................................................................................... 397
Firmware upgrades ............................................................................................................................................................. 402
Determine the installed revision of firmware ............................................................................................. 403
Perform a firmware upgrade ........................................................................................................................ 404
Solve fax or email problems .............................................................................................................................................. 408
Appendix A Printer specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 409

Printer dimensions .............................................................................................................................................................. 409
Printer space requirements ............................................................................................................................................... 411
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ...................................................................... 412
Operating-environment range .......................................................................................................................................... 412
ENWW ix
Certificate of Volatility ......................................................................................................................................................... 412
Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 419
x ENWW
1 Theory of operations
Learn about the printer theory of operations.
● Conventions used in this guide
● HP service and support
● Basic operation
● Formatter-control system
● Engine-control system
● Engine laser scanner system
● Paper handling system
● Input accessories
● Output accessories
● Document feeder system (M776)
● Scanning and image capture system (M776)
Conventions used in this guide

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.
TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product.
WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.
Additional service and support for channel partners
Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based Interactive
Search Engine (WISE).
ENWW 1
Access WISE for Channel partners
1. Select Services & Support, and then select Services Delivery.
2. Select Technical Support, and then select Technical Documentation.
Find information about the following topics
● Service manuals
● Service advisories
● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Install and configure
● Printer specifications
● Warranty and regulatory information
Additional service and support for HP internal personnel
HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:
Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - Portuguese
● WISE - French
Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Chinese (simplified)
● WISE - Chinese (traditional)
● WISE - Thai
Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)
● WISE - English
2 Chapter 1 Theory of operations ENWW

Basic operation
The printer routes all high-level processes through the formatter, which stores font information, processes the
print image, and communicates with the host computer.
● Sequence of operation
The basic printer operation comprises the following systems:
● The engine-control system, which includes the high-voltage and low-voltage power supplies (HVPS and
LVPS), fuser control circuits, and the DC controller printed circuit assembly (PCA)
● The laser/scanner system, which forms the latent image on the photosensitive drum
● The image-formation system, which transfers a toner image onto the paper
● The pickup, feed and delivery system, which uses a system of rollers and belts to transport the paper
through the printer
● Accessory (optional paper feeders)
Figure 1-1 Relationship between the main printer systems
Laser scanner system
Image-formation system
Engine-control system
Pickup, feed and delivery system
Accessory
Sequence of operation
Learn how the DC controller PCA controls the printer operating sequence.
ENWW Basic operation 3

Table 1-1 Sequence of operation
Period Duration Description
Waiting From the time the power is turned on, the door is ● Heats the fuser film in the fuser
closed, or when the printer exits Sleep mode until the
printer is ready for printing. ● Pressurizes the pressure roller in the fuser
● Detects the toner cartridges
● Detects the fuser
● Separates all of the developer rollers from the

photosensitive drums
● Detects the ITB
● Separates all of the primary transfer rollers from

the photosensitive drums
● Rotates and stops each motor
● Rotates and stops each fan
● Cleans the ITB
● Cleans the secondary transfer roller
Standby From the end of the waiting sequence or the last ● Is in the Ready state
rotation, until the formatter receives a print command,
or until the printer is turned off. ● Enters Sleep mode if the formatter sends the
sleep command
● Rotates and stops each fan
● Calibrates the printer if the calibration command is

sent
Initial rotation From the time the formatter receives a print command ● Rotates each motor
until the paper enters the paper path.
● Rotates each fan
● Activates the high-voltage power supply (high-

voltage bias)
● Prepares the laser/scanner unit
● Warms the fuser to the correct temperature

Table 1-1 Sequence of operation (continued)
Period Duration Description
Printing From the time the first sheet of paper enters the paper ● Forms the image on the photosensitive drums
path until the last sheet has passed through the fuser.
● Picks paper from the tray.
● Transfers the toner to the paper
● Fuses the toner image onto the paper
Last rotation From the time the last sheet of paper exits the fuser ● Stops each motor
until the motors stop rotating.
● Stops each fan
● Stops the high-voltage power supply (high-

voltage bias)
● Stops the laser/scanner unit
● Turns the fuser heater off
● If another print command is received, the printer

enters the initial rotation period when the last
rotation is complete.
ENWW Basic operation 5

Formatter-control system
Learn about how the formatter operates.
● Sleep mode
● Printer job language (PJL)
● Printer management language (PML)
● Control panel
● Easy-access USB port
● CPU
● Input/output (I/O)
● Memory
The formatter performs the following functions:
● Controls sleep mode
● Receives and processes print data from the various printer interfaces
● Monitors control panel functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel and the
network or bi-directional interface
● Develops and coordinates data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA
● Stores customer configuration settings and paper types.
● Stores font information
● Communicates with the host computer through the network or the bidirectional interface
Sleep mode
Learn about the printer sleep mode function.
NOTE: To modify sleep settings: At the control panel, select the Settings menu, select the General menu, select
the Energy Settings menu, and then select Sleep Settings.
This feature conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable period of time. When the printer is
in Sleep mode, the printer retains all settings, downloaded fonts, and macros. The default setting is for Sleep
mode to be enabled, and the printer enters Sleep mode after a 30-second idle time.
The printer firmware uses a combination of timers and Sleep settings to control when the printer enters a
different state, as well as what states the printer will enter. The available states are listed below, in descending
order, from using the most power to using the least power:
● Active: The printer control panel is fully illuminated. The power button light is illuminated.
● Shallow sleep: The printer control panel is dim and the content is grayed out, but is still readable. The
power button light is illuminated.
● Sleep: The printer control panel is off (blacked out). The power button light blinks once every three
seconds.

● Deep sleep: The printer control panel is off (blacked out). The power button light blinks once every three
seconds. The control panel and power button appearance is the same in this state as the sleep state.
However, the printer is drawing less than 1 watt of power in the deep sleep state (as opposed to 6 watts of
power in the sleep state).
● Off: This state is entered by pressing the power button or removing power from the printer. The power
button light is not illuminated.
NOTE: In some countries/regions, Sleep mode cannot be turned off.
The printer exits Sleep mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following events occur:
● The printer receives a print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command.
● A control-panel button is pressed or the touchscreen is touched.
● A cover or door is opened.
● The engine-test switch is pressed.
● A paper tray, other than Tray 1, is opened.
NOTE: If the printer is in the deep sleep state, opening Tray 1 or any other paper tray will not cause the
printer to exit Sleep mode.
NOTE: Printer error messages override the Sleep message. Some messages, such as 49 errors, do not allow
the printer to enter Sleep mode. Other messages allow the printer to enter Sleep mode at the appropriate time,
but the error message continues to appear.
Printer job language (PJL)

PJL is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL) and
PostScript (PS).
With standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions, such as these:
● Two-way communication with the host computer through a network connection or a USB device port: The
printer can inform the host about the control-panel settings, and the control-panel settings can be
changed from the host.
● Dynamic I/O switching: The printer uses this switching to be configured with a host on each I/O. The printer
can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur even
when the printer is offline.
● Context-sensitive switching: The printer can automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of each job
and configure itself to serve that personality.
● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next: For example, if a print job is sent to
the printer in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for
landscape printing.
Printer management language (PML)

PML allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back from the printer through the I/O ports.
ENWW Formatter-control system 7

Control panel
Learn about the printer control panels.
The M751 and E75245 control panel is a 2-line backlit control panel display with numeric keypad and additional
buttons for navigating control panel menus.
The M856 and E85055 control panel is a 10.9 cm (4.3 in) full-color SVGA with infrared touchscreen and
adjustable viewing angle.
The M776dn, M776z, and M776zs control panel is a 20.3 cm (8 in) full-color SVGA with infrared touchscreen and
adjustable viewing angle.
Easy-access USB port

Learn about the easy-access USB printer function.
This printer features easy-access USB printing, for quickly printing files without sending them from a computer.
The printer accepts standard USB flash drives in the USB port near the control panel. It supports the following
types of files:
● .pdf: A portable document format file used to present and exchange documents reliably, independent of
software, hardware, or operating system.
● .prn: A generic file created by choosing “Print to File” within the Print dialog box.
● .pcl: A file created in the Printer Command Language (PCL) which describes the layout of text and graphics
for the document.
● .ps: A file created in the Adobe PostScript language. These files can contain images, text or a combination
thereof.
● .cht: A vector graphics format file supported by a variety of charting and graphics software.
● .bdl: A file containing the printer firmware. Cannot be printed, but can be used to download new firmware to
the printer.
The USB port is disabled by default. Follow the instructions in the printer user guide to enable the USB port and
print USB documents.
CPU
Learn about the printer processor.
The formatter incorporates a 1.2 GHz processor.
Input/output (I/O)
Learn about the printer interfaces.
The printer supports the following interfaces:
● Hi-Speed USB 2.0
● 10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and IPv6
● Easy-access USB printing (no computer required)

Memory
Learn about the printer memory.
● Firmware
● Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM)
● Random access memory (RAM)
● HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)
The formatter incorporates different types of memory and storage to store the printer firmware as well as print-
job data and user settings.
Firmware
Learn about printer firmware storage.
The embedded MultiMedia Card (eMMC) on the formatter stores the printer firmware. A firmware upgrade
process is used to overwrite and upgrade the firmware. The upgrade can be done by using a network connection
(remote upgrade) or a USB flash drive. If a hard disk drive (HDD) is installed, the firmware will automatically
transfer to the HDD.
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM)

The printer uses NVRAM to store printer and user configuration settings.
The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected.
Random access memory (RAM)

The RAM on the formatter serves as a temporary storage area for printing and system operation.
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)

MEt effectively doubles the amount of standard memory through a variety of font- and data-compression
methods.
NOTE: MEt is available only when printing in printer command language (PCL) mode. It is not functional when
printing in PostScript (PS) mode.
ENWW Formatter-control system 9

Learn about the components in the engine-control system
● DC controller
● Low-voltage power supply
● High-voltage power supply
● Fuser control
The engine-control system receives commands from the formatter and interacts with the other main systems to
coordinate all printer functions. The engine-control system consists of the following components:
● DC controller
● Low-voltage power supply
● High-voltage power supply
● Fuser control
Figure 1-2 Engine-control system

Laser scanner system
DC controller
Image-formation system
Low-voltage power supply
Formatter
High-voltage power supply

Pickup, feed and delivery
system
Fuser control
Input accessory
Output accessory

DC controller
The DC controller controls the operation of the printer and its components. The DC controller starts the printer
operation when the printer power is turned on and the power supply sends DC voltage to the DC controller. After
the printer enters the standby period, the DC controller sends out various signals to operate motors, solenoids,
and other printer components based on the print command and image data that the host computer sends.
● Motors
● Fans
● Solenoids
● Clutches
● Switches
● Photointerrupter sensors
● Sensors
● LEDs
ENWW Engine-control system 11

Figure 1-3 DC controller block diagram (1 of 2)
Fan
Fan
Switch
Fan connecting Motor
PCA
Sensor
Clutch
Photointerrupter
Solenoid
Cartridge High-voltage
(Y/M/C/K) power supply B Switch
T2 high-voltage Photointerrupter
T2 roller
power supply
Sensor
Switch DC controller LED

T2 connecting PCA
Motor nputaccessory
I
High-voltage
ITB ass’y Laser scanner ass’y
power supply A
Fuser Memory PCA
Control panel
Fan
Low-voltage
AC input power supply
Formatter

Figure 1-4 DC controller block diagram (2 of 2)
putaccessory
Out
(Note)
Photo interrupter
Fan
Sensor
Duplex controller
Motor
Solenoid
Clutch Switch
DC controller
Motors
Learn about the printer motors.
The printer has 10 motors. The motors drive the components in the paper-feed and image-formation systems.
The DC controller monitors the fuser motor, the scanner motor, and drum motors 1, 2, and 3 to determine if a
motor has failed. It notifies the formatter when it encounters the following conditions:
● Startup failure: the motor does not reach a specified speed within a specified time from when the motor
starts.
● Rotational failure: the rotational speed of the motor is not in the specified range for a specified time after
the motor reaches a specified speed.
Table 1-2 Motors

Abbreviation Name Purpose Failure detection
M1 Drum motor 1 Drives the yellow, magenta, and cyan developer Yes
rollers.
Engages and disengages the T1 and T2 rollers.
M2 Drum motor 2 Drives the yellow, magenta, and cyan Yes

photosensitive drums.
M3 Drum motor 3 Drives the black photosensitive drum, black Yes

developer roller, ITB, and the residual toner feed
screw.

Table 1-2 Motors (continued)
M4 Fuser motor Drives the pressure roller and output roller. Yes
Pressurizes and releases the pressure roller.
Engages and disengages the primary transfer
roller. Engages and disengages the secondary
transfer roller.
M5 Feed motor Drives the Tray 1 pickup roller, the Tray 2 pickup No
roller, the Tray 2 feed roller, the registration
roller, the intermediate feed roller, and the
duplex re-pickup roller.
M6 Developer alienation motor Engages and disengages the developer rollers. Yes
M7 Scanner motor Drives the scanner mirror. Yes
M10 Lifter motor Lifts the lifting plate in Tray 2. No
M11 Switchback motor Drives the switchback output roller. No
(M856, E85055, and

MFP M776 models
only)
M15 Switchback motor Drives the output feed roller 2 and output upper No
roller.
(MFP models with
inline finisher only)
M12 Duplex motor Drives duplex feed roller 1, duplex feed roller 2, No
and duplex feed roller 3.
(M856, E85055, and
MFP M776 models
only)
M13 Duplex motor Drives duplex feed roller 1, duplex feed roller 2, No
and duplex feed roller 3.
(MFP models with
M14 Color sensor alienation motor Engages and disengages the color sensor. No
(M856, E85055, and

MFP M776 models
only)
M18 Decurl motor Drives decurl roller and output feed roller 1. No
(MFP models with

M19 Decurl motor Drives decurl roller and output upper roller. No
(M856, E85055, and

MFP M776 models
only)
M29 Fuser fan shutter motor Drives the fuser edge cooling shutter. No
(M856, E85055, and

MFP M776 models
only)

Table 1-2 Motors (continued)
M31 Fuser fan shutter motor Drives the fuser edge cooling shutter. No
(MFP models with

M34 Color sensor alienation motor Engages and disengages the color sensor. No
(MFP models with

The DC controller determines the following motor failures.
● Yellow developer motor startup abnormality (drum motor 1 failure)
● Yellow developer motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 1 failure)
● Magenta developer motor startup abnormality (drum motor 1 failure)
● Magenta developer motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 1 failure)
● Cyan developer motor startup abnormality (drum motor 1 failure)
● Cyan developer motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 1 failure)
● Black developer motor startup abnormality (drum motor 3 failure)
● Black developer motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 3 failure)
● Yellow drum motor startup abnormality (drum motor 2 failure)
● Yellow drum motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 2 failure)
● Magenta drum motor startup abnormality (drum motor 2 failure)
● Magenta drum motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 2 failure)
● Cyan drum motor startup abnormality (drum motor 2 failure)
● Cyan drum motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 2 failure)
● Black drum motor startup abnormality (drum motor 3 failure)
● Black drum motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 3 failure)
● ITB motor startup abnormality (drum motor 3 failure)
● ITB motor rotation abnormality (drum motor 3 failure)
● Fuser motor startup abnormality (fuser motor failure)
● Fuser motor rotation abnormality (fuser motor failure)
● Developer alienation motor abnormality (developer alienation motor failure)
● Scanner motor startup abnormality (scanner motor failure)
● Scanner motor rotation abnormality (scanner motor failure)

Fans
Learn about the printer fans.
The printer has five fans for preventing the temperature from rising in the printer and for cooling the printed
pages.
The DC controller determines if there is a fan failure and notifies the formatter if a fan locks for a specified time
from when the fan starts.
Table 1-3 Fans
Abbreviation Name Cooling area Type Speed
FM1 Power supply fan Around the low-voltage power Intake Full/half
supply
FM2 Fuser fan Around the fuser and delivery Intake 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1/1,
assembly
FM3 Cartridge front fan Around the toner cartridges Intake Full/half/low
FM4 Cartridge rear fan Around the toner cartridges Intake Full/half/low
FM5 Duplex fan Around the duplex feed area Intake Full
and feed motor
FM6 Decurl fan Decurl roller Intake Full
(M856, E85055, and Duplex feed area

MFP M776 models
only)
FM13
(MFP models with

FM7 Controller fan Around the DC controller and Exhaust Full/half

formatter
FM10
Around the low-voltage power
(MFP models with supply assembly
The DC controller detects the following fan failures.
● Fan motor 1 malfunction (cartridge front fan failure)
● Fan motor 2 malfunction (cartridge rear fan failure)
● Fan motor 3 malfunction (power supply fan failure)
● Fan motor 4 malfunction (duplex fan failure)
● Fan motor 5 malfunction (fuser fan failure)
● Fan motor 7 malfunction (decurl fan failure)
● Fan motor 8 malfunction (controller fan failure)

Solenoids
Learn about the printer solenoids.
Solenoids are used in printer control.
Table 1-4 Solenoids
Component abbreviation Component name
SL1 Primary transfer roller alienation solenoid
SL3 Tray 1 pickup solenoid
SL4 Duplex flapper solenoid (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SL5 Duplex flapper solenoid (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SL8 Duplex flapper solenoid (duplex models only)
Clutches
Learn about the printer clutches.
Clutches are used in printer control.
Table 1-5 Clutches
CL1 Tray 2 pickup clutch
CL2 Duplex re-pickup clutch (duplex models only)
CL3 Duplex clutch (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
CL4 Duplex clutch (MFP models with inline finisher only)
Switches
Learn about the printer switches.
Switches are used in printer control.
Table 1-6 Switches

SW1 24V interlock switch
SW2 5V interlock switch
SW3 Front door switch
SW4 Right door switch
SW5 Tray 2 media width size switch
SW6 Tray 2 media length size switch/Tray 2 presence switch
SW7 Power supply switch

Table 1-6 Switches (continued)
SW8 Right door switch 1 (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SW10 Output device presence switch (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SW11 ITB toner collection unit presence switch
SW18 Power supply switch (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SW19 Front door switch (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SW23 Power supply switch (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SW24 Front door switch (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SW25 Right door switch 1 (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SW301 Test print switch
Photointerrupter sensors
Learn about the printer photointerrupter sensors.
Photointerrupter sensors are used in printer control.
Table 1-7 Photointerrupter sensors

SR2 Drum home position sensor CMY
SR3 Drum home position sensor K
SR4 Developer alienation sensor
SR5 Tray 2 media surface sensor
SR6 Tray 2 media out sensor
SR7 Fuser output sensor
SR8 Registration sensor
SR9 Registration media width sensor 1
SR14 Tray 1 last media sensor
SR16 Fuser loop sensor 1
SR17 ITB toner collection near full sensor
SR18 Tray 2 media level sensor
SR19 FD1 media full sensor (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SR20 Duplex flapper position sensor (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SR21 Decurl pressure switch mechanism home position sensor (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SR22 Duplex feed sensor (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)

Table 1-7 Photointerrupter sensors (continued)
SR24 Color sensor alienation sensor (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SR27 Residual toner feed screw rotation sensor
SR28 Duplex flapper position sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SR29 Duplex feed sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SR30 Decurl pressure switch mechanism home position sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SR31 FD1 media full sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SR32 FD2 media full sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SR41 FD1 media full sensor
SR42 T1 roller home position sensor
SR43 Fuser fan shutter sensor
SR44 Fuser pressure release sensor
SR49 T1 roller home position sensor (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SR50 Fuser pressure release sensor (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SR52 Fuser fan shutter sensor (M856, E85055, and MFP M776 models only)
SR56 T1 roller home position sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SR57 Fuser pressure release sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SR58 Fuser fan shutter sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
SR59 Color sensor alienation sensor (MFP models with inline finisher only)
Sensors
Learn about printer sensors.
Sensors are used in printer control.
Table 1-8 Sensors

TH1 Sub-thermistor 3
TH3 Main thermistor
TP1 Thermoswitch
TH5 Scanner temperature sensor
RD1 Registration density sensor 1

Table 1-8 Sensors (continued)
PAPOUT2 Fuser output sensor 2
- Environmental sensor
CS Color sensor
MS Media sensor
LEDs
Learn about the printer LEDs.
LEDs indicate if a printer system is correctly functioning.
Table 1-9 LEDs
LED1 Pre-exposure LED 1

Learn about low-voltage power supply (LVPS) functions.
● Low-voltage power supply voltages description
● Over-current/over-voltage protection
● Safety
● Sleep mode operation
● Low-voltage power supply failure detection
The LVPS circuit converts the AC power from the wall receptacle into the DC voltage that the printer components
use.

Figure 1-5 Low-voltage power-supply circuit
AC input
Power supply switch 5V interlock switch

SW7 SW2
Fuse
FU101
DC controller
Fuser
POWER_SW
+24VBRL +3.3VC
+5VA +5VC +5VD

Fusing circuit
Fuse
FU102
FET
Zero crossing /ZEROX

detection circuit +3.3VA
+3.3V
generation
circuit
+5V +5VA
generation +3.3VB
circuit 5VB_ON
FET
+3.3VB2
+5VB
Rectifying FET
circuit FET
+24VA +3.3VC
+24VA
+24V/+5V FET
generation FET
circuit
+24VA_ON
+24VB
24V/5V CHG
Protection
circuit
+5VB +24V 24V interlock switch

SW1
Formatter
Low-voltage power supply voltages description

Learn about low-voltage power supply (LVPS) voltages.
The LVPS converts the AC power into three DC voltages, which it then subdivides, as described in the following
table.

Table 1-10 Converted DC voltages
Main DC voltage Sub-voltage Inactive OFF Active OFF Print/standby
+24 V +24 VA OFF OFF ON
+24 VB OFF OFF ON
+24 VBRL OFF OFF ON
+5 V +5 VA ON ON ON
+5 VB OFF OFF ON
+5 VC OFF OFF ON
+5 VD OFF OFF ON
+3.3 V +3.3 VA ON ON ON
+3.3 VB OFF ON ON
+3.3 VB2 OFF Intermittent ON
+3.3 VC OFF OFF ON
Over-current/over-voltage protection
Learn about low-voltage power supply (LVPS) over-current/over-voltage protection.
The LVPS automatically stops supplying the DC voltage to the printer components whenever it detects excessive
current or abnormal voltage. The LVPS has a protective circuit against over-current and over-voltage to prevent
failures in the power supply circuit.
CAUTION: If DC voltage is not being supplied from the LVPS, the protective function might be running. In this
case, turn the power switch off and unplug the power cord.
Do not turn the power switch on until the root cause is found and corrected.
If the protective function is active, the DC controller notifies the formatter of an LVPS failure. In addition, the LVPS
has two fuses to protect against over-current. If over-current flows into the AC line, the fuse stops the AC power.
Safety
Learn about LVPS safety protection.
For personal safety, the printer interrupts +24VB power when the 24V interlock switch is turned off . This stops
the DC power supply to the following components:
● High-voltage power supply (HVPS)
● Fuser motor
● Feed motor
● Developer alienation motor
● Duplex switchback motor

● Fuser fan shutter motor
● Fuser
When the remote switch control circuit turns the printer power on or off, AC power still flows, even when the
power switch is turned off. Unplug the printer power cord before disassembling the printer.
Sleep mode operation

Learn about the low-voltage power supply (LVPS) Sleep mode function.
Sleep mode conserves energy by stopping the power to several components when the printer is idle. If the DC
controller detects voltage that is too high when the printer is in Sleep mode, it determines that the LVPS has
failed, and it notifies the formatter.
Low-voltage power supply failure detection

Learn about low-voltage power supply (LVPS) failure detection.
The DC controller determines a LVPS failure and notifies the formatter when the LVPS does not supply +24 V.

High-voltage power supply
Learn about high-voltage power supply (HVPS) functions.
● High-voltage power supply circuits
● Fuser bias
The DC controller controls the HVPS to generate biases. The HVPS delivers the high-voltage biases to the
following components used to transfer toner during the image-formation process:
● Primary charging roller (in the toner cartridges)
● Developing roller (in the toner cartridges)
● Primary transfer roller
● Secondary transfer roller
● Static charge eliminator
● Pressure roller
● ITB cleaning brush
● ITB cleaning roller
High-voltage power supply circuits

Learn about high-voltage power supply (HVPS) circuits.
The HVPS contains the following separate circuits.

Figure 1-6 High-voltage power supply circuits
High-voltage power supply A
ITB cleaning roller

T1 bias circuit
bias circuit
ITB cleaning brush Fuser bias circuit

bias circuit
ITB cleaning roller
ITB cleaning brush Pressure roller
T1 roller
Static charge eliminator
K T2 roller
Primary charging bias Developing bias

T2 bias circuit
circuit circuit
High-voltage power supply B T2 high-voltage power supply
DC controller
Table 1-11 High-voltage power supply circuits

Circuit Description
Primary-charging-bias generation The primary charging bias negatively charges the surface of the
photosensitive drums to prepare for image formation.
Developing-bias generation The developing bias adheres toner to an electrostatic latent image
formed on the photosensitive drums.

Table 1-11 High-voltage power supply circuits (continued)
Circuit Description
Primary transfer-bias generation The primary transfer bias transfers the toner from each
photosensitive drum onto the ITB.
Secondary-transfer-bias generation The positive secondary transfer bias transfers the toner image from
the ITB onto the paper. The negative bias transfers residual toner on
the secondary transfer roller back to the ITB. The residual toner on
the ITB is deposited in the toner collection unit.
Fuser bias
Learn about fuser bias.
The printer uses instant-on fusing. The fuser bias is DC positive for improved print quality. The fuser bias circuit is
located in the high-voltage power supply.

Fuser control
Learn about fuser control functions.
● Fuser circuits
● Fuser control functions
● Fuser heater protection
● Fuser unit life detection
● Fuser identification
The DC controller and components in the fuser perform the following functions related to fuser operation:
● Control fuser temperature
● Detect fuser failures
● Prevent excessive temperature rise
● Detect remaining life in the fuser
● Determine if the correct fuser is installed
Fuser circuits
Learn about the fuser circuits.
The fuser heater control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit control the fuser temperature according to
commands from the DC controller.

Figure 1-7 Fuser components
TH2 Fuser film
H1, H2
TP1
Rear side of printer
TH3
TH1
Pressure roller
TH4
FUSER TEMPERATURE signal
FUSER HEATER CONTROL signal
Front side of printer
Fuser heater Fuser heater

control circuit safety circuit
Low-voltage power supply DC controller
Table 1-12 Fuser components
Type of component Abbreviation Name Function
Heaters H1 Fuser main heater Heats the center area of the

fuser film
Heaters H2 Fuser sub-heater Heats the edge of the fuser film
Thermistors TH3 Main thermistor Detects the center temperature

of the fuser film
(Contact type)
Thermistors TH1 Sub-thermistor 3 Detects the temperature at one

end of the fuser heater
(Contact type)

(Contact type)

(Contact type)
Thermoswitch TP1 Thermoswitch Prevents an abnormal

temperature rise of the fuser
(Contact type) heater

Fuser control functions
Learn about fuser control functions.
The diagram below describes the LVPS, DC controller, and fuser systems.
Figure 1-8 Fuser control

AC input
DC controller
Zero crossing /ZEROX
detection
circuit
FSR_RLD1
RL501 Relay drive Fuser heater
circuit FSR_RLD2 safety circuit
RL502
CAREN_SCL
Current
detection CAREN_SDA
circuit
FSR_TRD1
Fuser heater
control circuit FSR_TRD2
Fuser
FSRTH_F
TH4
FSRTH_M
TH3
FSRTH_R
TH2
FSRTH_SS
TH1
+24VBRL
+24VBFU3
TP1
H1, H2
Fuser film ass’y
Pressure roller
The printer has the following fuser control functions.

Table 1-13 Fuser control functions
Failure detection function Supported feature
Fuser temperature control Yes
Fuser failure detection Yes
Frequency detection circuit failure detection Yes
Fuser pressure release mechanism failure detection Yes
Fuser type discrepancy detection Yes
Fuser type identification detection No
Fuser presence detection Yes
Fuser life detection Yes
Relay failure detection No
Fuser roller cleaning Yes
Fuser heater protection

Learn about fuser heater protection.
Fuser heater protection is a feature that detects excessive temperatures in the fuser and interrupts the power
supply to the fuser heater.
The following three protective components prevent excessive rising temperature in the fuser heater:
● DC controller: The DC controller constantly monitors the detected temperature of the thermistor and
interrupts power to the fuser heater when it detects a temperature above a certain threshold.
● Fuser-heater safety circuit: The fuser heater safety circuit constantly monitors the detected temperature of
the thermistor and interrupts power to the fuser heater when it detects a temperature above a certain
threshold.
● Thermoswitch: If the temperature in the fuser heater exceeds a certain threshold, the contact to the
thermoswitch breaks.
Fuser unit life detection

Learn about fuser unit life detection.
The fuser life is tracked by fuser rotations, and not by the number of pages printed. This is a more accurate
tracking method since the fuser rotates for every print job and during cleaning cycles. At the beginning of a print
job, the fuser rotates in order to move the paper from the tray to the imaging area. At the end of a print job, the
fuser rotates in order to clear the paper path. Small print jobs cause more start and stop cycles, which cause
more wear on the fuser. There will be variations in fuser life depending on customer usage. Customers who are
running one and two page intermittent jobs with long pauses between each job might reach the fuser low
message sooner due to the fuser rotating more times per page than it would for larger print jobs.
Fuser identification
Learn about fuser identification.

The printer detects the type and presence of the fuser. The DC controller notifies the formatter when it fails to
detect the type or presence of the fuser.
NOTE: This printer detects if a fuser of the correct voltage for the printer is installed. If a fuser of the incorrect
voltage is installed, the DC controller notifies the formatter and an error message is displayed on the control
panel.
The fuser includes a fusible link that is blown when a new fuser is installed. This automatically resets the
maintenance counter.

Engine laser scanner system
Learn about the engine laser scanner system functions.
● Laser scanner failure detection
● Safety
● Image-formation process
● Toner cartridges
● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit
The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drums.
The DC controller receives instructions from the formatter regarding the image of the page to be printed. The DC
controller signals the lasers to emit light, and the laser beams pass through lenses and onto the scanner mirror,
which rotates at a constant speed. The mirror reflects the beam onto the photosensitive drum in the pattern
required for the image, exposing the surface of the drum so it can receive toner.
The main components of the laser/scanner system, which are controlled by signals sent from the DC controller,
are:
● Laser assembly
● Scanner motor assembly
● Beam detect (BD) sensor
● Scanner mirror
ENWW Engine laser scanner system 33

Figure 1-9 Laser scanner system
Photosensitive drum
Photosensitive drum
K
BD sensor
Laser ass’y
Scanner mirror
Scanner motor ass’y
DC controller
Laser scanner failure detection

Learn about laser scanner failure detection.
The DC controller determines an optical unit failure and notifies the formatter of the error status when any of the
following occurs:
● Beam detect (BD) failure detection: The laser beam is not detected or the interval is outside the specified
range during printing.
● Laser scanner motor startup failure: The scanner motor does not reach a specified rotation frequency
within a specified period of time from when the laser scanner starts up.
● Laser scanner motor abnormal rotation: The laser scanner motor does not reach a specified rotational
frequency within a specified period of time during a print operation.
● Laser scanner failure detection
Safety
Learn about laser scanner safety functions.
The laser scanner assembly has a mechanical laser shutter. For the safety of users and service technicians, the
laser shutter interrupts the optical path of the laser scanner assembly when the front door (SW1/SW2) or right
door (SW1/SW2) are opened.

Image-formation process
Learn about the image-formation process.
● Step 1: Pre-exposure
● Step 2: Primary charging
● Step 3: Laser-beam exposure
● Step 4: Development
● Step 5: Primary transfer
● Step 6: Secondary transfer
● Step 7: Separation
● Step 8: Fusing
● Step 9: ITB cleaning
● Step 10: Drum cleaning
The image-formation system creates the printed image on the paper. The system consists of the following
components:
● Four toner cartridges
● Four imaging drums
● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
● Primary transfer roller
● Secondary transfer roller
● Fuser
● Laser scanner
● High-voltage power supplies
The DC Controller controls the internal components of the image formation system (according to commands
received from the formatter) to form the toner image on the photosensitive drum surface. The toner image is
then transferred to the print media and fused.

Figure 1-10 Image-formation system
High-voltage power supply A
Cartridge ITB
T1 roller
Y Fuser
M
T2 roller
C
K
Laser scanner ass’y
High-voltage power supply B T2 high-voltage power supply
DC controller
The drum motor drives the following image formation components:
● Imaging drums
● Developer rollers
● Primary charging rollers (follows the imaging drum)
● ITB drive roller
● ITB (follows the ITB drive roller)
● Primary transfer roller (follows the ITB)
● Secondary transfer roller (follows the ITB)
The developer alienation motor engages and disengages the developer rollers.

The fuser motor performs the following functions:
● Drives the pressure roller
● Drives the fuser film (follows the pressure roller)
● Engages and disengages the primary transfer roller
● Engages and disengages the secondary transfer roller
NOTE: The primary charging rollers are located in the imaging drums. The developer rollers are located in the
toner cartridges.
The following figure shows the location of the motors.
Figure 1-11 Image formation system motors
M
C
K
M2 M1 M6 M3 M4
DC controller
Table 1-14 Image-formation system motors
Abbreviation Component name
M1 Drum motor 1
M2 Drum motor 2
M3 Drum motor 3
M4 Fuser motor
M6 Developer alienation motor

The following figure shows the location of the sensors.
Figure 1-12 Image-formation system sensors
Environment sensor
SR4
Y
M
SW11 RD1
C RD2
SR17 K
SR2 MS
SR3
DC controller
Table 1-15 Image formation system sensors
SR2 Drum home position sensor CMY
SR3 Drum home position sensor K
SR4 Developer alienation sensor
SR17 ITB toner collection near full sensor
SW11 ITB toner collection unit presence switch
MS Media sensor
-- Environmental sensor
The image-formation process consists of ten steps divided into six functional blocks.

Figure 1-13 Image-formation process
: Paper path Delivery
: Direction of drum rotation
Fusing
: Functional block
8. Fusing
: Step
Transfer
7. Separation
ITB cleaning
9. ITB cleaning
6. Secondary transfer
Developing
5. Primary transfer
4. Developing
Drum cleaning
Y M C K 10. Drum cleaning
3. Laser-beam exposure
2. Primary charging 1. Pre-exposure

Latent image formation Pickup
Table 1-16 Image formation process
Functional block Steps Description
Latent image formation 1. Pre-exposure An invisible latent image forms on the surface of the
photosensitive drum.
2. Primary charging
3. Laser-beam exposure
Development 4. Developing Toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the

photosensitive drum.
Transfer 5. Primary transfer The toner image transfers to the paper.
6. Secondary transfer
7. Separation
Fusing 8. Fusing The toner fuses to the paper to make a permanent

image.
ITB cleaning 9. ITB cleaning Residual toner is removed from the ITB.
Drum cleaning 10. Drum cleaning Residual toner is removed from the drum.
Step 1: Pre-exposure
Learn about the pre-exposure process.
To prepare for primary charging, light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum
to remove any residual electrical charges from the drum surface.

Figure 1-14 Pre-exposure
LED
Photosensitive drum
Step 2: Primary charging

Learn about the primary charging process.
The primary-charging roller contacts the photosensitive drum and charges the drum with negative potential.
Figure 1-15 Primary charging

Primary charging roller
Primary charging bias
Photosensitive drum
Step 3: Laser-beam exposure

Learn about the laser-beam exposure process.
The laser beam strikes the surface of the photosensitive drum in the areas where the image will form. The
negative charge neutralizes in those areas, which are then ready to accept toner.

Figure 1-16 Laser-beam exposure
Laser beam
Photosensitive drum
Step 4: Development
Learn about the development process.
Toner acquires a negative charge as the developing cylinder contacts the developing blade. Because the
negatively charged surface of the photosensitive drums have been neutralized where they have been struck by
the laser beam, the toner adheres to those areas on the drums. The latent image becomes visible on the surface
of each drum.
Figure 1-17 Development
Developer roller
Develer blade
Developing bias
Photosensitive drum
Step 5: Primary transfer

Learn about the primary transfer process.
The positively-charged primary-transfer rollers contact the ITB, giving the ITB a positive charge. The ITB attracts
the negatively-charged toner from the surface of each photosensitive drum, and the complete toner image
transfers onto the ITB.

Figure 1-18 Primary transfer
Photosensitive
drum
ITB
T1 roller
T1 bias
Step 6: Secondary transfer

Learn about the secondary transfer process.
The paper acquires a positive charge from the secondary-transfer roller, and attracts the negatively-charged
toner from the surface of the ITB. The complete toner image transfers onto the paper.
Figure 1-19 Secondary transfer
ITB
Paper
T2 roller
T2 bias
Step 7: Separation
Learn about the separation process.
The stiffness of the paper causes it to separate from the ITB as the ITB bends. The static-charge eliminator
removes excess charge from the paper to make sure that the toner fuses correctly.

Figure 1-20 Separation
ITB
Paper
Static charge eliminator
T2 roller
Step 8: Fusing
Learn about the fusing process.
To create the permanent image, the paper passes through heated, pressurized rollers to melt the toner onto the
page. Fusing bias is added to the pressure roller to improve the print quality.
Figure 1-21 Fusing

Fuser heater
Fuser film
Paper
Fusing bias Pressure roller
Step 9: ITB cleaning

Learn about the ITB cleaning process.
The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the ITB. The residual toner feed screw deposits
residual toner in the toner collection unit. The residual toner which cannot be removed by the cleaning blade is
charged by the ITB cleaning brush, and then transferred from the ITB surface to a photosensitive drum by the
primary transfer (T1) roller.

Figure 1-22 ITB cleaning
ITB cleaning brush
Residual toner
ITB
ITB cleaning roller
ITB cleaning roller bias

Photosensitive
drum
ITB cleaning brush bias
Step 10: Drum cleaning

Learn about the drum cleaning process.
The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off the surface of the photosensitive drum. The toner feed screw
deposits the residual toner in the toner collection unit.
Figure 1-23 Drum cleaning

T1 roller
ITB
Photosensitive
drum
Cleaning blade
Residual toner feed screw

Toner cartridges
Learn about the printer toner cartridges.
● Design
● Memory chip
● Dynamic security
● JetIntelligence
● Toner seal
● Toner level and cartridge life detection
The printer has four toner cartridges and four imaging drums, one for each color (yellow, magenta, cyan, and
black).
Design
The cartridge system consists of two types of cartridges: toner cartridges and imaging drums.
The toner cartridge is filled with toner and consists of the following components:
● Developer roller
● Memory chip
The imaging drum consists of the following components:
● Photosensitive drum
● Primary-charging roller
● Memory chip
The DC controller rotates the drum motor to drive the photosensitive drum, developer roller, the primary-
charging roller, and the ITB drive roller.

Figure 1-24 Toner cartridge system
DC controller
M6
Photosensitive drum
SR4 SR2/SR3
M M1/M2/M3
Developer roller
Primary charging
roller
E-label
DT-cartridge O-cartridge
E-label
Table 1-17 Toner cartridge system
Function Supported feature
Toner cartridge presence detection Yes
Toner level detection Yes
Toner cartridge life detection Yes
Toner cartridge mis-installation detection Yes
Developer alienation control Yes
Developer alienation motor failure detection Yes
Drum discharge mechanism Not applicable
Memory chip
Learn about the toner cartridge memory chip.
The memory chip is non-volatile memory that stores information about the usage of the toner cartridge and
helps protect the customer from counterfeit cartridges. This chip is also used to detect the presence of a

cartridge within the printer or when a cartridge is installed in the wrong slot. The printer reads and writes the
data in the memory chip.
NOTE: The memory chip does not store any customer print, scan, copy, fax, or digital send information. The
memory chip also supports the printer Jet Intelligence toner cartridge management functions.
Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.
Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP chip
or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work in the future.
As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues to use
security measures to protect the quality of our customer experience, maintain the integrity of our printing
systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication methods that change
periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in the future. HP printers and
original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When cartridges are cloned or
counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks, compromising the printing
experience.
*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP cannot
guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you are using a non-
original HP cartridge, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an original HP security chip or
unmodified HP electronic circuitry.

JetIntelligence
Learn about toner cartridge JetIntelligence.
● Authentication
● Anti-theft
JetIntelligence supports two features for managing toner cartridges.
● The authentication feature allows customers to specify the use of only genuine HP toner cartridges in the
printer.
● The anti-theft feature enables locking a cartridge to a specific printer or fleet of printers.
Authentication
Learn about toner cartridge authentication.
The genuine HP authentication feature allows a customer to specify that only genuine HP supplies can be used in
a printer. If a non-HP or used supply is installed, the printer will not print. This feature is disabled by default, and
can be enabled or disabled from the control panel or the Embedded Web Server (EWS).
If a genuine HP toner cartridge from another printer is moved to a printer with this feature enabled, the toner
cartridge will authenticate and print, unless the toner cartridge has passed the low state. If the toner cartridge
has passed the low state, an Unauthorized Cartridge message displays on the control panel.
If a non-HP toner cartridge is used in a printer with this feature enabled, the message Unauthorized Cartridge
appears on the control-panel display.
NOTE: If a customer suspects they have a counterfeit cartridge, they should report it by going to
www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit and selecting Report now.
Anti-theft
Learn about toner cartridge anti-theft.
The toner cartridge anti-theft feature allows a customer to configure the printer to automatically lock genuine
HP toner cartridges to a specific printer or fleet of printers when they are installed. A locked toner cartridge will
only work in the specified printer or fleet of printers. This feature prevents toner cartridges from being stolen
and used in another printer, or from being moved from an authorized printer to an unauthorized printer. This
feature is disabled by default, and can be enabled or disabled from the control panel, the Embedded Web Server
(EWS), or Web Jetadmin.
When the anti-theft feature is enabled, the toner cartridge in a printer will only work in the specified printer or
fleet of printers. If a locked toner cartridge is moved to another printer, the cartridge will not print and the
message Protected Cartridge appears on the control-panel display.
IMPORTANT: When a toner cartridge is locked to a specific printer or fleet of printers, it cannot be unlocked. This
is a permanent operation.
Toner seal
Learn about the toner cartridge seal.
The toner cartridge seal is opened automatically when the toner cartridge is installed into the printer.

Toner level and cartridge life detection
Learn about toner cartridge toner level and cartridge life detection.
Toner level detection: For the toner cartridge, the DC controller detects the remaining toner in the cartridge
utilizing electrical properties, and then notifies the formatter of the remaining toner level.
Cartridge life detection: For the toner cartridge and imaging drums, cartridge life detection is measured in two
ways.
1. Toner level:
– For the first 50% of cartridge life, toner level is measured through pixel counting by the DC controller.
Once the level reaches 50%, the toner level sensor utilizes electrical properties and pixel counting to
determine the amount of toner remaining.
2. Rotations of internal components (OPC and developer):
– The DC controller monitors drum rotations and reports them to the formatter as percent life
remaining.

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit
Learn about the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit
● Secondary transfer roller functions
● Calibration
The ITB unit accepts the toner images from the photosensitive drums and transfers the completed image to the
paper. The ITB unit has the following main components:
● ITB
● ITB drive roller
● Primary transfer rollers
● ITB cleaner
Figure 1-25 ITB unit
DC controller
ITB cleaner
SL1 M4 Fuser motor
T1 roller alienation
solenoid
Drum motor 3 M3
ITB
SR4
SR10
ITB drive roller
SW11 SR17
T1 roller
Toner collection box
Table 1-18 ITB unit

Primary transfer roller alienation control Yes
Primary transfer roller alienation mechanism failure detection Yes
ITB life detection Yes
ITB presence detection No
Blade cleaning mechanism Yes
Electrostatic cleaning mechanism Yes

Table 1-18 ITB unit (continued)
ITB toner collection box full detection No
ITB toner collection box presence detection No
ITB perimeter detection Yes
ITB seal detection sensor failure detection No
New ITB detection Yes
ITB cleaning mechanism Yes
Toner collection unit full detection Yes
Toner collection unit presence detection Yes
Secondary transfer roller functions

Learn about the secondary transfer roller functions
Table 1-19 Secondary transfer roller functions
Secondary transfer roller cleaning mechanism Yes
Secondary transfer roller presence detection No
Secondary transfer roller life detection Yes
Secondary transfer roller alienation control Yes
Calibration
Learn about the calibration functions
Table 1-20 Secondary transfer roller functions
Color-plane registration (CPR) correction control Yes
Environment correction control Yes
Image density control (DMAX) Yes
Image halftone control (DHALF) Yes
Registration density sensor failure detection Yes
Color sensor control No
Gray axis control (GAS) No
Environment sensor failure detection Yes

Paper handling system
Learn about the printer paper handling system.
● Paper handling functional blocks
● Photo sensors and switches
● Motors, clutches, and solenoids
● Paper trays
The DC controller controls the paper handling system according to commands from the formatter. The paper
handling system uses a series of rollers to move the paper through the printer.
Paper handling functional blocks

Learn about the printer paper handling functional blocks.
The paper handling system consists of the following three functional blocks. The DC controller controls each
block to pick up, feed and deliver the paper.
● Pickup-and-feed block: Controls the movement of the paper from each pickup source to the fuser inlet
● Fuser-and-delivery block: Controls the movement of the paper from the fuser to the delivery destination
● Duplex block: Controls the movement of the paper from the duplex switchback unit to the duplex re-pickup
unit (duplex models only)

Figure 1-26 Fuser-and-delivery and pickup-and-feed blocks (M751/E75245)
Fuser-and-delivery block
Simplex paper path
Pickup-and-feed block
ENWW Paper handling system 53

Figure 1-27 Duplex block (M751/E75245)
Simplex paper path Duplex block
Duplex paper path

Figure 1-28 Fuser-and-delivery and pickup-and-feed blocks (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
Simplex paper path

Figure 1-29 Duplex block (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
Duplex block
Simplex paper path

Duplex paper path

Figure 1-30 Fuser-and-delivery and pickup-and-feed blocks (M776zs)
Simplex paper path

Figure 1-31 Duplex block (M776zs)
Duplex block
Simplex paper path

Duplex paper path
Photo sensors and switches

Learn about the printer paper handling sensors and switches.
The following figures show the photo sensors and switches for the paper handling system.

Figure 1-32 Photo sensors and switches (M751/E75245)
SR41
SR7
SR26
SR16
MS
SR9
SR12
SR25
SR8 SR15
SR14
SR18 SR6 SR5
SW5 SW6
Table 1-21 Photo sensors and switches (M751/E75245)
Abbreviation Component
MS Media sensor

Figure 1-33 Photo sensors and switches (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
SR22
SR19
PAPOUT3
CS
PAPOUT2
SR7
SR16
SR26
MS
SR9
SR12
SR25
SR8 SR15
SR14
SR18 SR6 SR5
SW5 SW6
Table 1-22 Photo sensors and switches (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)

SR22 Duplex feed sensor

Table 1-22 Photo sensors and switches (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z) (continued)
CS Color sensor
MS Media sensor
Figure 1-34 Photo sensors and switches (M776zs)

SR31
SR29
SR32
PAPOUT3
PAPOUT2
SR7
SR16
SR26
SR9
SR12
SR25
SR8

Table 1-23 Photo sensors and switches (M776zs)
SR29 Duplex feed sensor
CS Color sensor
MS Media sensor
Motors, clutches, and solenoids

Learn about the printer paper handling motors, clutches, and solenoids.
The following figures show the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the paper handling system.

Figure 1-35 Motors, solenoids, and clutches (M751/E75245)
M4 M24 M3
SL8
CL2
SL3
CL1
M10 M5
Table 1-24 Motors, solenoids, and clutches (M751/E75245)
M3 Drum motor 3
M4 Fuser motor
M5 Feed motor
M10 Lifter motor
M24 Duplex switchback motor
SL8 Duplex flapper solenoid
CL2 Duplex re-pickup clutch

Figure 1-36 Motors, solenoids, and clutches (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
M4 M19 M11 SL5 M12
CL3
CL2
SL3
CL1
M3 M10 M5
Table 1-25 Motors, solenoids, and clutches (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)

M3 Drum motor 3
M4 Fuser motor
M5 Feed motor
M10 Lifter motor
M11 Switchback motor
M12 Duplex motor
M19 Decurl motor

Table 1-25 Motors, solenoids, and clutches (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z) (continued)
CL3 Duplex clutch

Figure 1-37 Motors, solenoids, and clutches (M776zs)
M4 M18 SL4 M15 M13
CL3
CL2
SL3
CL1
M3 M10 M5
Table 1-26 Motors, solenoids, and clutches (M776zs)

M3 Drum motor 3
M4 Fuser motor

Table 1-26 Motors, solenoids, and clutches (M776zs) (continued)
M5 Feed motor
M10 Lifter motor
M13 Duplex motor
M15 Switchback motor
M18 Decurl motor
CL3 Duplex clutch

Paper trays
Learn about the printer tray functions.
● Tray 2 media type detection
● Feed speed control
● Jam detection
Moving paper from Tray 1 and Tray 2 involves the interaction of multiple components within the printer. The
following sections describe these processes.
Tray 2 media type detection

Learn about the Tray 2 media type detection.
he printer selects the optimal print mode based upon the media type detected by the media sensor. The media
sensor consists of an optical sensor, which detects the surface texture of the paper, and an ultrasonic sensor,
which measures the thickness of the paper. The formatter informs the DC controller that the printer is in auto-
sense mode and the DC controller changes the fuser mode based on media type.
Following are the print modes detected by the printer:
● Normal
● Heavy media 1
● Heavy media 2
● Heavy media 3
● Light media 1
● Glossy media 1
● Glossy media 2
● Glossy media 3
● Glossy film
● Overhead transparency
The DC controller determines a media sensor error and reports it to the formatter when the value detected by
the media sensor is out of a specified range of values.

Figure 1-38 Media sensor
Ultrasonic sensor
Optical sensor
Pickup ass’y
Feed speed control

Learn about the printer paper handling feed speed control function.
The DC controller adjusts the feed speed to improve the print quality depending on the paper type. The paper is
fed at a specified speed according to the print mode designated by the formatter.
Table 1-27 Print mode and feed speed

Print mode Feed speed Feed speed Media sensor detection
Full color Monochrome
Auto Not applicable Not applicable Yes
Normal media 1 1/1 1/1 Yes
Normal media 2 Not applicable Not applicable No
Heavy media 1 3/4 3/4 Yes
Heavy media 4 1/3 1/3 No
Heavy media 5 1/3 1/3 No
Heavy media 6 Not applicable Not applicable No
Light media 1 1/1 1/1 Yes
Light media 2 1/1 1/1 No
Light media 3 1/1 1/1 No
Glossy media 1 1/3 1/3 Yes

Table 1-27 Print mode and feed speed (continued)
Print mode Feed speed Feed speed Media sensor detection
Full color Monochrome
Glossy film 1/3 1/3 Yes
Photo media 1 Not applicable Not applicable No
Envelope 1 1/2 1/2 No
Envelope 2 Not applicable Not applicable No
Envelope 3 Not applicable Not applicable No
OHT 1/3 1/3 Yes
Extra light media Not applicable Not applicable No
Label 1/2 1/2 No
Designated media 1 (rough media) 3/4 3/4 No
Designated media 2 No No No
Designated media 3 (light rough media) 3/4 3/4 No
LGT mode 1/3 1/3 No
Table 1-28 Paper handling system functions

Function Supported
Tray 2 media size detection Yes
Tray 2 presence detection Yes
Tray 2 media surface detection Yes
Tray 2 media presence detection Yes
Tray 2 media level detection Yes
Tray 2 lift-up control Yes
Tray 2 lift-down control Yes
Tray 2 multiple-feed prevention mechanism Yes
Tray 2 pickup roller presence detection Yes
Tray 2 pickup roll alienation detection Yes
Tray 1 media presence detection Yes
Tray 1 media width detection No
Tray 1 last-media detection Yes
Skew-feed prevention mechanism Yes

Table 1-28 Paper handling system functions (continued)
Function Supported
Feed speed control Yes
Loop control Yes
Media detection Yes
OHT detection Yes
Image leading edge positioning Yes
Media length detection Yes
Media width detection Yes
Pressure roller pressure release control Yes
Output bin media-full detection Yes
Automatic delivery Yes
Duplex switchback control Yes
Duplex feed control Yes
Jam detection
Learn about the printer jam detection function.
The printer uses the following sensors to detect the paper as it moves through the paper path and to report to
the DC controller if the paper has jammed.
● Registration sensor (SR8)
● Fuser output sensor (SR7)
● Fuser output sensor 2 (PAPOUT2; M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z/M776zs only)
● Fuser output sensor 3 (PAPOUT3; M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z/M776zs only)
● FD1 media full sensor (SR41; M751/E75245 only)
● FD1 media full sensor (SR19; M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z only)
● FD1 media full sensor (SR31; M776zs only)
● Duplex feed sensor (SR22: M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z only)
● Duplex feed sensor (SR29: M776zs only)
● Registration media width sensor 1 (PS9; M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z/M776zs only)
● PF feed sensor (PS24) – 550-sheet tray only
● PD cassette 1 feed sensor (PS15) – 2x550-sheet tray only

● PD cassette 2 feed sensor (PS18) – 2x550-sheet tray only
● HCI cassette 1 feed sensor (PS33) – high-capacity input (HCI) tray only
● HCI cassette 2 feed sensor (PS36) – HCI tray only
● HCI feed sensor (PS38) – HCI tray only
Figure 1-39 Jam detection sensors (M751/E75245 and 550-sheet tray)

Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
SR41
SR7
SR26
SR16
SR8
SR24
SR24

Figure 1-40 Jam detection sensors (M751/E75245 and 2x550-sheet tray)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
SR41
SR7
SR26
SR16
SR8
SR15
SR18

Figure 1-41 Jam detection sensors (M751/E75245 and HCI tray)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
SR41
SR7
SR26
SR16
SR8
SR8
SR6
SR3

Figure 1-42 Jam detection sensors (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
SR19
SR22
PAPOUT3
PAPOUT2
SR7
SR16
SR26
SR9
SR12
SR25
SR8

Figure 1-43 Jam detection sensors (M776zs)
SR31
SR29
PAPOUT3
PAPOUT2
SR7
SR16
SR26
SR9
SR12
SR25
SR8
Table 1-29 Jams that the printer detects

Jam Supported feature
No pick jam 1 Yes
No pick jam 2 Yes
No pick jam 3 Yes
No pick jam 4 No
Pickup stay jam 1 Yes
Pickup stay jam 2 No

Table 1-29 Jams that the printer detects (continued)
Fuser delivery delay jam 1 Yes
Fuser delivery delay jam 2 No
Fuser delivery stay jam 1 Yes
Fuser delivery stay jam 2 No
Residual paper jam 1 Yes
Residual paper jam 2 No
Door open jam 1 Yes
Door open jam 2 No
Door open jam 3 No
Door open jam 4 No
Multiple feed jam 1 No
Fuser wrap jam 1 Yes
Fuser wrap jam 2 No
Fuser wrap jam 3 No
Fuser wrap jam 4 No
Duplex switchback jam 1 No
Duplex re-pickup jam 1 No

Table 1-29 Jams that the printer detects (continued)
Delivery delay jam 1 Yes
Delivery delay jam 2 (M776zs only) Yes
Delivery delay jam 3 No
Delivery delay jam 4 No
Delivery stay jam 1 (M776zs only) Yes
Delivery stay jam 2 No
Duplex feed delay jam 1 No
Duplex feed stay jam 1 No
Duplex re-pickup delay jam 1 Yes
Inappropriate to the delivery path jam 1 (M776zs only) Yes
Inappropriate to the delivery path jam 2 (M856/E85055/M776dn/ Yes

M776z only)
Transfer area wrapping jam Yes

Input accessories
Optional paper feeders are available for this printer.
● 550-sheet paper tray
● 2x550-sheet paper tray
● HCI paper tray
The printer supports up to two 550-sheet trays in addition to one 2x550-sheet tray or one high-capacity input
(HCI) tray.
ENWW Input accessories 79

550-sheet paper tray
The 550-sheet paper tray is installed under the printer. It picks up paper and feeds it into the printer.
● Controller
● Motor control
● Electrical components
● Paper pickup
● Jam detection
NOTE: The printer supports one or two 550-sheet paper trays.
Figure 1-44 550-sheet paper tray paper path
Table 1-30 550-sheet paper tray supported functions

Cassette lift-up control Yes
Cassette presence detection Yes
Cassette media size detection Yes

Table 1-30 550-sheet paper tray supported functions (continued)
Cassette media stack surface detection Yes
Cassette media out detection Yes
Cassette media level detection Yes
Multiple-feed prevention Yes
Cassette pickup roller presence detection Yes
Cassette pickup roller alienation detection Yes
Controller
The 550-sheet paper tray controller controls the operational sequence of the paper tray.
Figure 1-45 550-sheet paper tray controller
550-sheet paper feeder
Motor
+3.3VB
Clutch
+24VA
DC controller Paper feeder controller
Photointerruptor
Switch
Motor control
The 550-sheet paper tray contains two motors that control paper feed and tray lift operations.
Table 1-31 550-sheet paper feeder motors
Abbreviation Component name Drives
M14 PF feed motor Tray pickup and feed rollers
M15 PF lifter motor Tray lift mechanism
Electrical components
The 550-sheet paper tray contains several motors, solenoids, sensors, and switches.

Table 1-32 550-sheet paper tray electrical components
Component type Abbreviation Component name
Motor M14 Feed motor
Motor M15 Lifter motor
Clutch CL6 Pickup clutch
Photointerrupter SR21 Lifter motor rotation sensor
Photointerrupter SR22 Media out sensor
Photointerrupter SR23 Media surface sensor
Photointerrupter SR24 Feed sensor
Switch SW15 Media width size switch
Switch SW16 Door switch
Switch SW17 Media length size switch/cassette presence switch
Switch SW18 Lifting plate position sensor
Paper pickup
The 550-sheet paper tray picks up one sheet from the paper- tray and feeds it to the printer.
Figure 1-46 Paper pickup and feed operation

SR24
SR22 SR23
SW15 SW17
SW18 SW16
SR21
CL6
M15
M14
Table 1-33 Paper pickup and feed components

M14 Feed motor
M15 Lifter motor
CL6 Pickup clutch
SR21 Lifter motor rotation sensor
SR22 Media out sensor
SR23 Media surface sensor

Table 1-33 Paper pickup and feed components (continued)
SR24 Feed sensor
SW15 Media width size switch
SW16 Door switch
SW17 Media length size switch/cassette presence switch
SW18 Lifting plate position sensor
Jam detection
The 550-sheet paper tray uses the paper feeder feed sensor (PS24) to detect the presence of paper and to
check whether paper has jammed.

Figure 1-47 Jam detection (550-sheet paper tray)
Simplex paper path
Duplex paper path
SR41
SR7
SR26
SR16
SR8
SR24
SR24
The 550-sheet paper feeder detects the following jams:
● Media input delay jam 1 (550-sheet paper tray): Paper did not reach the registration sensor in time.
● Media input delay jam 2 (550-sheet paper tray): Paper did not reach the source tray feed sensor in time.
● Media input delay jam 3 (550-sheet paper tray): Paper did not reach the tray 3 feed sensor in time.
● Pickup stationary jam (550-sheet paper tray): The feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper
within a specified time after the sensor detects the leading edge.
● Residual paper jam (550-sheet paper tray): The feed sensor detects the presence of paper for a specified
time during an automatic delivery operation.
● Right door open jam (550-sheet paper tray): The right door open is detected during a paper feed operation.

2x550-sheet paper tray
The 2x550-sheet paper tray is installed under the printer. It picks up paper and feeds it into the printer.
● Controller
● Motor control
● Paper pickup
● Jam detection

Figure 1-48 2x550-sheet paper tray paper path
Table 1-34 2x550-sheet paper tray supported functions

Cassette lift-up control Yes
Cassette presence detection Yes
Cassette media size detection Yes
Cassette media stack surface detection Yes

Table 1-34 2x550-sheet paper tray supported functions (continued)
Cassette media out detection Yes
Cassette media level detection Yes
Multiple-feed prevention Yes
Cassette pickup roller presence detection Yes
Cassette pickup roller alienation detection Yes
Controller
The 2x550-sheet paper tray controller controls the operational sequence of the paper tray.
Figure 1-49 2x550-sheet paper tray controller
2x550-sheet paper deck
Motor
+3.3VB
Clutch
+24VA
DC controller Paper deck controller
Photointerruptor
Switch
Motor control
The 2x550-sheet paper tray contains four motors that control paper feed and tray lift operations.
Table 1-35 2x550-sheet paper feeder motors
M6 PD cassette 2 lifter motor Lower tray lift mechanism
M7 PF feed motor 2 Lower tray pickup and feed rollers
M12 PD feed motor 1 Upper tray pickup and feed rollers
M15 PD cassette 1 lifter motor Upper tray lift mechanism

The 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand contains several motors, solenoids, sensors, and switches.
Table 1-36 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand electrical components
Motor M6 Lower tray lifter motor
Motor M7 Lower tray feed motor
Motor M12 Upper tray feed motor
Motor M13 Upper tray lifter motor
Clutch CL4 Upper tray pickup clutch
Clutch CL5 Lower tray pickup clutch
Photointerrupter SR13 Upper tray media out sensor
Photointerrupter SR14 Upper tray media surface sensor
Photointerrupter SR15 Upper tray feed sensor
Photointerrupter SR16 Lower tray media out sensor
Photointerrupter SR17 Lower tray media surface sensor
Photointerrupter SR18 Lower tray feed sensor
Photointerrupter SR19 Lower tray lifter motor rotation sensor
Photointerrupter SR20 Upper tray lifter motor rotation sensor
Switch SW7 Upper tray media width size switch
Switch SW8 Upper tray media length size switch/upper tray presence switch
Switch SW10 Lower tray media width size switch
Switch SW11 Lower tray media length size switch/lower tray presence switch
Switch SW13 Upper tray lifting plate position sensor
Switch SW14 Lower tray lifting plate position sensor
Paper pickup
The 2x550-sheet paper tray picks up one sheet from the paper- tray and feeds it to the printer.

SR15
SR13 SR14
CL4 M12
SW7 SW8 SR20 SR18
SW13
M13
SR16 SR17
CL5
SW10 SW11 SR19 M7
SW14
M6 SW9

M6 Lower tray lifter motor
M7 Lower tray feed motor
M12 Upper tray feed motor
M13 Upper tray lifter motor
CL4 Upper tray pickup clutch
CL5 Lower tray pickup clutch
SR13 Upper tray media out sensor
SR14 Upper tray media surface sensor
SR15 Upper tray feed sensor
SR16 Lower tray media out sensor
SR17 Lower tray media surface sensor
SR18 Lower tray feed sensor
SR19 Lower tray lifter motor rotation sensor
SR20 Upper tray lifter motor rotation sensor
SW7 Upper tray media width size switch
SW8 Upper tray media length size switch/upper tray presence switch
SW9 Door switch
SW10 Lower tray media width size switch
SW11 Lower tray media length size switch/lower tray presence switch

SW13 Upper tray lifting plate position sensor
SW14 Lower tray lifting plate position sensor
Jam detection
The 2x550-sheet paper tray uses the upper tray feed sensor (PS15) and lower tray feed sensor (PS18) to detect
the presence of paper and to check whether paper has jammed.

Figure 1-51 Jam detection (2x550-sheet paper tray)
The 2x550-sheet paper feeder detects the following jams:
● Media input delay jam 1 (2x550-sheet paper tray): Paper did not reach the registration sensor in time.
● Media input delay jam 2 (2x550-sheet paper tray): Paper did not reach the source tray feed sensor in time.
● Media input delay jam 3 (2x550-sheet paper tray): Paper did not reach the tray 3 feed sensor in time.
● Pickup stationary jam (2x550-sheet paper tray): The feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper
within a specified time after the sensor detects the leading edge.

● Residual paper jam (2x550-sheet paper tray): The feed sensor detects the presence of paper for a
specified time during an automatic delivery operation.
● Right door open jam (2x550-sheet paper tray): The right door open is detected during a paper feed
operation.

HCI paper tray
The HCI paper tray is installed under the printer. It picks up paper and feeds it into the printer.
● Controller
● Motor control
● Paper pickup
● Jam detection

Figure 1-52 HCI paper tray paper path
Table 1-38 HCI paper tray supported functions

Right tray lift-up control Yes
Left tray lift-up control Yes
Right tray presence detection Yes
Left tray presence detection Yes

Table 1-38 HCI paper tray supported functions (continued)
Right tray media size detection Yes
Left tray media size detection Yes
Right tray media stack surface detection Yes
Left tray media stack surface detection Yes
Right tray media out detection Yes
Left tray media out detection Yes
Right tray media level detection Yes
Left tray media level detection Yes
Right tray multiple-feed prevention Yes
Left tray multiple-feed prevention Yes
Right tray pickup roller presence detection Yes
Left tray pickup roller presence detection Yes
Controller
The HCI paper tray controller controls the operational sequence of the paper tray.
Figure 1-53 HCI paper tray controller
HCI
Motor
+3.3VB
Clutch
+24VA
DC controller HCI controller
Photointerruptor
Switch
Motor control
The HCI paper tray contains four motors that control paper feed and tray lift operations.

Table 1-39 HCI paper feeder motors
M31 HCI cassette 2 feed motor Left tray pickup and feed rollers
M32 HCI cassette 1 lifter motor Right tray lift mechanism
M33 HCI cassette 1 feed motor Right tray pickup and feed rollers
M34 HCI cassette 2 lifter motor Left tray lift mechanism
The 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand contains several motors, solenoids, sensors, and switches.
Table 1-40 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand electrical components
Motor M31 Left tray feed motor
Motor M32 Right tray lifter motor
Motor M33 Right tray feed motor
Motor M34 Left tray lifter motor
Clutch CL31 Right tray pickup clutch
Clutch CL32 Left tray pickup clutch
Photointerrupter SR31 Right tray media out sensor
Photointerrupter SR32 Right tray media surface sensor
Photointerrupter SR33 Right tray feed sensor
Photointerrupter SR34 Left tray media out sensor
Photointerrupter SR35 Left tray media surface sensor
Photointerrupter SR36 Left tray feed sensor
Photointerrupter SR37 Side feed guide open sensor
Photointerrupter SR38 Feed sensor
Switch SW31 Right tray media size switch, media level switch, and tray
presence switch
Switch SW32 Left tray media size switch, media level switch, and tray presence
switch
Paper pickup
The HCI paper tray picks up one sheet from the paper- tray and feeds it to the printer.

M1
CL2 SR6
SR7
SR8
SR4 SR5
M3
CL1
SR2 SR1
SR3
M4 M2
SW2 SW1 SW3

M31 Left tray feed motor
M32 Right tray lifter motor
M33 Right tray feed motor
M34 Left tray lifter motor
CL31 Right tray pickup clutch
CL32 Left tray pickup clutch
SR31 Right tray media out sensor
SR32 Right tray media surface sensor
SR33 Right tray feed sensor
SR34 Left tray media out sensor
SR35 Left tray media surface sensor
SR36 Left tray feed sensor
SR37 Side feed guide open sensor
SR38 Feed sensor
SW31 Right tray media size switch, media level switch, and tray presence switch

SW32 Left tray media size switch, media level switch, and tray presence switch
SW33 Door switch
Jam detection
The HCI paper tray uses the right tray feed sensor (PS33), left tray feed sensor (PS36), and feed sensor (PS38) to
detect the presence of paper and to check whether paper has jammed.

Figure 1-55 Jam detection (HCI paper tray)
The HCI paper feeder detects the following jams:
● Media input delay jam 1 (HCI paper tray): Paper did not reach the registration sensor in time.
● Media input delay jam 2 (HCI paper tray): Paper did not reach the source tray feed sensor in time.
● Media input delay jam 3 (HCI paper tray): Paper did not reach the tray 3 feed sensor in time.
● Pickup stationary jam (HCI paper tray): The feed sensor does not detect the trailing edge of paper within a
specified time after the sensor detects the leading edge.

● Residual paper jam (HCI paper tray): The feed sensor detects the presence of paper for a specified time
during an automatic delivery operation.
● Right door open jam (HCI paper tray): The right door open is detected during a paper feed operation.

Output accessories
An inner finisher is available for this printer.
● Inner finisher
ENWW Output accessories 101

Inner finisher
The inner finisher is installed against the printer output bin. It delivers print media to its output bin after the
stapling process.
● Controller
● Motor control
● Delivery operation
● Jam detection
Figure 1-56 Inner finisher paper path
Table 1-42 Inner finisher supported functions

Mailbox mode Yes
Stacker mode No
Function separator mode No
Job separator mode No

Table 1-42 Inner finisher supported functions (continued)
Collator mode No
Staple control Yes
Controller
The controller PCA controls the operational sequence of the inner finisher.
Figure 1-57 Inner finisher controller
Motor control
The inner finisher contains nine motors for paper feed, paper alignment, and staple functions.
Table 1-43 Inner finisher motors

M1 SS feed motor Entrance feed roller, output roller and return

belt

Table 1-43 Inner finisher motors (continued)
M2 Return belt motor Return belt
M3 Front alignment motor Front alignment plate
M4 Rear alignment motor Rear alignment plate
M5 Assist motor Assist guide
M6 Tray lifting motor Output bin
M7 Staple shift motor Stapler
M8 Staple motor Staple
M10 Paddle motor Paddle
The inner finisher determines the following motor failures.
● Return belt motor failure
● Front alignment motor failure
● Rear alignment motor failure
● Assist motor failure
● Staple shift motor failure
● Staple motor failure
● Paddle motor failure
The inner finisher contains several motors, solenoids, sensors, and switches.
Table 1-44 Inner finisher electrical components

Motor M1 SS feed motor
Motor M2 Return belt motor
Motor M3 Front alignment motor
Motor M4 Rear alignment motor
Motor M5 Assist motor
Motor M6 Tray lifting motor
Motor M7 Staple shift motor
Motor M8 Staple motor
Motor M10 Paddle motor
Solenoid SL1 Trailing edge dropping solenoid

Table 1-44 Inner finisher electrical components (continued)
Photointerrupter PS1 Output sensor
Photointerrupter PS2 Paddle home position sensor
Photointerrupter PS3 Return belt home position sensor
Photointerrupter PS4 Front alignment plate home position sensor
Photointerrupter PS5 Rear alignment plate home position sensor
Photointerrupter PS6 Processing tray media presence sensor
Photointerrupter PS7 Assist home position sensor
Photointerrupter PS8 Media holder home position sensor
Photointerrupter PS9 Stack tray media height sensor
Photointerrupter PS10 Stack tray lower limit sensor
Photointerrupter PS11 Staple shift home position sensor
Photointerrupter PS12 Manual staple sensor
Photointerrupter PS14 Stack tray home position sensor
Photointerrupter PS18 Curl sensor
Switch MSW1 Front cover switch
Delivery operation
The inner finisher delivers print media from the printer in a mode specified by the formatter.
Figure 1-58 Inner finisher delivery motors and solenoids

M10 M2 M5 M8
SL1
M6 M3/4 M9 M7 M1

Table 1-45 Inner finisher delivery motors and solenoids
M1 SS feed motor
M2 Return belt motor
M3 Front alignment motor
M4 Rear alignment motor
M5 Assist motor
M6 Tray lifting motor
M7 Staple shift motor
M8 Staple motor
M10 Paddle motor
SL1 Trailing edge dropping solenoid
Figure 1-59 Inner finisher delivery sensors and switches
PS18
PS4 MSW1
PS5
PS2 PS1
PS3
PS8 PS6
PS9
PS7
PS14 PS12
PS10 PS11
Table 1-46 Inner finisher delivery sensors and switches

PS1 Output sensor
PS2 Paddle home position sensor
PS3 Return belt home position sensor
PS4 Front alignment plate home position sensor
PS5 Rear alignment plate home position sensor
PS6 Processing tray media presence sensor
PS7 Assist home position sensor
PS8 Media holder home position sensor
PS9 Stack tray media height sensor

Table 1-46 Inner finisher delivery sensors and switches (continued)
PS10 Stack tray lower limit sensor
PS11 Staple shift home position sensor
PS12 Manual staple sensor
PS14 Stack tray home position sensor
PS18 Curl sensor
MSW1 Front cover switch
Jam detection
The inner finisher uses the output sensor (PS1) to detect the presence of the paper and to check whether the
paper is being fed correctly.
Figure 1-60 Jam detection sensor (inner finisher)
PS1
The inner finisher detects the following jams:
● Residual paper jam: Bin 1 output init. jam.
● Entrance delay jam: Bin 1 output delay jam.
● Entrance stay jam: Bin 1 output stay jam.
● Early timing jam: Inter-page gap jam.
● Manual stapler staple jam: Manual staple jam.

Document feeder system (M776)
Review the following information about the document feeder system.
● Document feed system
NOTE: This section is for the M776 printer only.

Document feed system
Learn about the various components of the docuemt feed system.
● Sensors in the document feeder
● Document feeder paper path
● Document feeder simplex operation
● Document feeder e-duplex operation
● Deskew operation
● Document feeder hinges
This section describes the following:
● Sensors in the document feeder
● Document feeder paper path
● Simplex single-pass scanning
● Electronic duplexing (e-duplex) single-pass scanning
● Deskew operation
● Document feeder hinges
The printer supports single-pass electronic duplexing (e-duplex) copy jobs. Two separate scan modules scan the
front-side and back-side of an e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document feeder.
For the WF class, this ADF supports a smart background which auto-crops and adjusts the image extents.
Sensors in the document feeder

Learn about the document feeder sensor locations and functions.
The document feeder contains the following sensors:
● ADF paper present sensor: Detects whether a document is present in the document feeder. If paper is
present in the document feeder when copies are made, the printer scans the document using the
document feeder. If no paper is present when copies are made, the printer scans the document using the
scanner glass.
● ADF Y (length) sensor: Detects whether a legal-size original is present in the document feeder.
● ADF jam cover sensor: Detects whether the document feeder cover is open or closed.
● ADF paper path deskew sensor: Detects the top of the page as it enters the deskew rollers.
● ADF paper path pick success sensor: Detects a successful one page feed from the document feeder tray.
NOTE: This sensor uses ultrasonic sound to detect a multi-page paper feed.
● Paper path sensor 1: Detects the top of the page as it approaches the front-side scan module (document
feeder glass).
ENWW Document feeder system (M776) 109

Figure 1-61 Document feeder sensors
2 5 1
3
4
Table 1-47 Document feeder sensors
Item Description
1 ADF Y (length) sensor
2 ADF paper present sensor
3 ADF deskew sensor
4 Paper path sensor 1
NOTE: For an e-duplex copy job, this sensor is used to activate the
front-side scan module (in the scanner base) and the front-side
background selector (in the document feeder), if needed.
5 ADF jam cover sensor (open the jam access cover and insert a
folded piece of paper to activate the flag)
Document feeder paper path

Review the following information about the document feeder paper path.
Figure 1-62 Document feeder paper path

Table 1-48 Document feeder paper path
Item Description Item Description
1 Input tray 7 Front-side scan module location
NOTE: This scan module (document feeder glass) is

located in the scanner base and is not pictured.
2 Pre-pick roller 8 Back-side scan module
3 Pick roller 9 ADF pick success transmitter
4 ADF pick success receiver 10 Separator roller
5 Deskew drive roller 11 Exit drive roller
6 Prescan drive roller 12 Lift plate
Document feeder simplex operation

Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder simplex job.
1. The ADF jam cover sensor detects when the cover door is in the closed position.
2. The ADF paper present sensor activates when paper is loaded onto the input tray.
3. The feed motor rotates to raise the lift plate and starts to pick the loaded paper.
4. The ADF multi-pick (ultrasonic) sensor activates when the leading edge of the media is driven past the
sensor. The printer firmware registers a successful pick operation.
5. The ADF paper path deskew activates when the leading edge of the paper passes it. The printer firmware
registers the leading edge of the paper position.
6. The leading edge of the paper drives into the nip point of the deskew drive roller and the deskew pinch
rollers. This creates a buckle of paper by the nip point for pick-skew correction.
7. The deskew motor rotates the deskew drive roller to pull the paper into the prescan drive roller.
8. The pick motor stops turning and allows both the pick and feed roller to turn freely while the paper is
pulled in by the deskew drive roller.
9. The feed motor rotates to drive the paper into the prescan front-side sensor. The firmware registers the
leading edge position of the paper as the multi-pick sensor activates.
10. The feed motor continues to rotate and drive the leading edge of the paper through the preset distance
from the multi-pick sensor to the front-side scan zone. The scanner begins the scanning and data retrieval
process.
11. The ADF multi-pick (ultrasonic) sensor deactivates when the trailing edge of the paper passes the sensor.
The firmware registers the trailing edge of the paper position.
12. The feed motor continues to rotate and drive the trailing edge of the paper through the preset distance
from the ADF multi-pick (ultrasonic) sensor to the front-side scan zone. The scanner ends the scanning and
data retrieval process.
13. The feed motor continues to rotate and ejects the trailing edge of the paper into the output bin.
14. One of the following occurs:

– If the copy job is complete, the ADF paper present sensor deactivates. The feed motor reverses
rotation to raise the pick roller.
– If the copy job is not complete, the ADF paper present sensor is active. The printer firmware detects
additional pages in the input tray and the process repeats.
Document feeder e-duplex operation

Following is the basic sequence of operation for a document feeder simplex job.
NOTE: For an e-duplex copy job, the background scan operation begins immediately after the simplex
sequence of operation ends.
1. The feed motor continues to drive the paper until the leading edge activates the prescan back-side sensor.
The printer firmware registers the position of the leading edge of the paper.
2. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the leading edge of the paper through the preset distance from
prescan back-side sensor to the back-side background selector scan zone. The back-side background scan
module begins scanning and retrieval of the data.
3. The prescan back-side sensor deactivates when the trailing edge of the paper passes it. The printer
firmware registers the trailing edge of the paper position.
4. The feed motor continues to rotate to drive the trailing edge of the paper edge past the back-side
background selector scan zone.
5. The feed motor continues to rotate and ejects the trailing edge of the paper into the output bin.
6. One of the following occurs:
– If the copy job is complete, the ADF paper present sensor deactivates. The feed motor reverses
rotation to raise the pick roller.
– If the copy job is not complete, the ADF paper present sensor is active. The printer firmware detects
additional pages in the input tray and the process repeats.
Deskew operation
Sliding side guides on the input tray make sure that the paper stack is correctly aligned at the center of the input
tray when paper is loaded in the tray. The correct position of the loaded paper is parallel with the direction of
travel into the document feeder paper path.

Figure 1-63 Document feeder side guides
The document feeder further reduces paper skew due to improper loading of paper in the input tray by buckling
the paper to create a paper buffer.
The document feeder aligns the leading edge of the paper parallel with the deskew drive rollers before the
paper is driven further into the document feeder paper path.
NOTE: If the page to be copied is smaller than the minimal sliding guide setting, do not use the document
feeder for the copy job. Attempting to copy too small of a page using the document feeder can result in
document feeder jams and/or damage to the original page. Instead, use the flatbed glass to copy the page.
Document feeder hinges

Review the following information about the document feeder hinges.
The document feeder hinges allow positioning the assembly vertically above the scanner glass to accommodate
the placement of books and other objects up to 25 mm (1.0 in) in height on the scanner glass. The document
feeder still closes (the bottom of the ADF is kept parallel to the scanner glass) and allows the printer to operate.
The document feeder will withstand a downward force of about 4.5 kg (10 lb) applied at the front edge center of
the assembly—when the fulcrum (such as the spine of a book) is located anywhere on the scanner glass and
parallel to its long axis—without breaking, deforming, detaching or experiencing performance degradation.
The document feeder hinges support the assembly in the open position and prevent the document feeder from
suddenly closing and causing damage or a loud noise.
The hinges can hold the document feeder static in all positions higher than 100 mm (3.93 in); measured at the
front of the assembly. Less than 2.3 kg (5 lb) of force is required to open or close the document feeder.
The hinges allow the document feeder to open to an angle of between 60º and 80º from the horizontal position
(this angle will not allow the printer to tip over).

Figure 1-64 Document feeder open (book mode)
Figure 1-65 Document feeder open (60º to 80º)
Scanning and image capture system (M776)

Learn about the scanning and image capture system.

The scanner is a carriage-type platen scanner which includes the frame, glass, scan module, and a scan control
board (SCB). The scanner has a sensor to detect legal-sized media and a switch to indicate when the document
feeder is opened.
The document feeder and control panel are attached to the scanner. If the scanner fails, it can be replaced as a
whole unit. The scanner replacement part does not include the document feeder, control panel, or SCB.
ENWW Scanning and image capture system (M776) 115

2 Solve problems
Learn about solving printer problems.
● HP service and support
● Solve problems checklist
● Troubleshooting process
● Tools for troubleshooting
● Resolve print-quality problems
● Print quality troubleshooting guide
● Clean the printer
● Solve paper handling problems
● Clear paper jams
● Solve performance problems
● Solve connectivity problems
● Service mode functions
● Firmware upgrades
● Solve fax or email problems
HP service and support

Learn about HP access to additional service and support information.
Additional service and support for channel partners
Channel partners go to partner.hp.com, and then use the steps below to access the HP Web-based Interactive
Search Engine (WISE).
Access WISE for Channel partners
1. Select Services & Support, and then select Services Delivery.
2. Select Technical Support, and then select Technical Documentation.
ENWW 117
Find information about the following topics
● Service manuals
● Service advisories
● Up-to-date control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting
● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues
● Remove and replace part instructions and videos
● Install and configure
● Printer specifications
● Warranty and regulatory information
Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - French
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Thai
● WISE - English
118 Chapter 2 Solve problems ENWW

Solve problems checklist
Learn about the solve problems checklist.
● Use the solve problems checklist
● Print the Settings menu map
● Print the current settings page
● Print the event log
● Pre-boot menu options
Use the solve problems checklist

Learn about using the solve problems checklist.
If the printer is not correctly functioning, complete the steps (in the order given) in the following checklist. If the
printer fails a checklist step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions for that step. If a checklist
step resolves the problem, skip the remaining checklist items.
1. If the control panel is blank or black, check the following before proceeding:
● Check to make sure that the printer is not in Sleep mode (press a button on the control panel).
● Check the power cable.
● Check that the power is turned on.
● Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the printer power configuration. (See the label that is on
the back of the printer for voltage requirements.) If a power strip is in use, and its voltage is not within
specifications, connect the printer directly into the electrical outlet. If it is already connected into the
outlet, try a different outlet.
NOTE: The following conditions indicate that the printer has frozen while in Sleep mode. Opening a door
or pressing a control-panel button causes the printer to wake up from Sleep mode.
● The control panel home button LED is illuminated
● The power-switch LED flashes once every three to five seconds
If the control panel is not responding, or if it appears black or blank, try the following:
a. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
b. Verify that the system is correctly functioning.
TIP: The LED on the formatter will blink if the control panel is not detected or the cables are not
properly seated.
● Try printing from a host computer. Does the printer print a test page?
● Is the printer HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) accessible?
c. Verify that the control panel is correctly functioning.
ENWW Solve problems checklist 119

1. Turn the power off.
2. Reseat the cable connections on the bottom of the control-panel assembly and the control-
panel connectors at the formatter.
3. Turn the printer power on, and then check for functionality of the control-panel by pressing a
button on the control panel.
d. Try upgrading the firmware. If the firmware upgrade fails to resolve the problem, and the printer still
freezes while in Sleep mode, elevate the case.
e. If the error persists and the EWS functions correctly, replace the control-panel assembly.
2. The control panel should indicate a Ready, Paused, or Sleep mode on status. If an error message displays,
resolve the error.
● Try using the Power-on checks section in the printer Troubleshooting Manual to solve the problem.
3. For network connection errors, verify that the network port is active and that the cables are securely
seated.
a. Check the network cable connections between the printer and the computer or network port. Make
sure that the connections are secure.
NOTE: The network LEDs should be illuminated and flashing.
b. Make sure that the cables are not faulty by trying different cables, if possible.
c. Check the network connection. Verify that the port is active.
4. Use one of the following options to print a configuration page. If the printer is connected to a network, an
HP Jetdirect page also prints.
Print a configuration page from an LCD control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the down arrow to scroll to Administration,
and then press the OK button.
2. If necessary, use the down arrow button to scroll to Reports, and then press the OK button.
3. If necessary, use the down arrow button to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the
OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button to select
it.
5. Use the up arrow button to scroll to Print, and then press the OK button to print the pages.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.
Print a configuration page from a touchscreen control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button. Open the
following menus:
Configuration/Status Pages
Configuration Page
2. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
3. Touch the Print button to print the pages.
● If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains paper.
TIP: Make sure that the selected paper size and type meet HP specifications. Also open the Trays
menu on the printer control panel and verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper type
and size.
● If the page jams in the printer, follow the instructions on the control panel to clear the jam.
● If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the printer hardware.
● If the page prints correctly, the printer hardware is working. The problem is with the host computer,
with the print driver, or with the program.
5. Use one of the following options to print a supplies status page and then check that the maintenance items
below are not at their end-of-life.
NOTE: HP long-life consumables and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual individual
life/yield during normal use varies depending on usage, environment, media, and other factors. Estimated
life is not an implied guarantee or warrantable.
Print a supplies status page from an LCD control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the down arrow to scroll to Administration,
and then press the OK button.
2. If necessary, use the down arrow button to scroll to Reports, and then press the OK button.
3. If necessary, use the down arrow button to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the
OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Supplies Status Page, and then press the OK button to
select it.
5. Use the up arrow button to scroll to Print, and then press the OK button to print the pages.

Print a supplies status page from a touchscreen control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button. Open the
following menus:
Configuration/Status Pages
Supplies Status Page
2. Touch Supplies Status Page to select it.
If a maintenance item needs to be replaced, order the part number provided below:
● Fuser
– 3WT87-67901 (M751/E75245; 110V)
– 3WT88-67901 (M751/E75245; 220V)
– 4YL16-67901 (M856/E85055/M776; 110V)
– 4YL17-67901 (M856/E85055/M776; 220V)
● Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
– RM2-1504-000CN
● Toner collection unit
– 3WT90-67901
● Tray 1 rollers
– RM2-1525-000CN
● Tray 2-x rollers
– RM2-1526-000CN
6. Verify that the correct print driver for this printer is installed. Check the program to make sure that the print
driver for this printer is used. The print driver is on the CD that came with the printer, or can be downloaded
from this Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM751 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE75245
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM856 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE85055 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
7. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, the
problem is with the program. If this solution does not work (the document does not print), complete these
steps:
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the printer software installed.
b. If the printer is connected to the network, connect the printer directly to a host computer with a USB
cable. Redirect the printer to the correct port, or reinstall the software (make sure to select the new
connection type).

Print the Settings menu map
To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Settings menu.
● Print the settings menu map from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Print the settings menu map from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Print the settings menu map from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to print the menu map from a touchscreen control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Reports, and then
select OK.
2. Select Configuration/Status Pages.
3. Select Settings Menu Map, and then select OK.
4. Use the down arrow to scroll down to Cancel, and then use the right arrow to highlight the print icon
. Select OK to print the pages.
Print the settings menu map from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to print the menu map from a touchscreen control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

Print the current settings page
Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful in the
troubleshooting process.
● Print the current settings page from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Print the current settings page from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Print the current settings page from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to print the current settings page from an LCD control panel.
select OK.
2. Select Configuration/Status Pages.
3. Select Current Settings Page, and then select OK.
Print the current settings page from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to print the current settings page from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select the Current Settings Page option.
4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

Print the event log
Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the Interpret
control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.
● Print the event log from the Support Tools menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Print the event log from the Support Tools menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Print the event log from the Service menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Clear the event log from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Print the event log from the Support Tools menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to print the event log from the Support Tools menu from an LCD control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools, and
then select OK.
2. Select Troubleshooting, and then select OK.
3. Select Event Log.
Print the event log from the Support Tools menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/
M776)
Use the following procedure to print the event log from the Support Tools menu from a touchscreen control
panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Troubleshooting
b. Event Log
3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.
Print the event log from the Service menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to print the event log from the Service menu from an LCD control panel.
then select OK.
2. Select Service, and then select OK.
3. On the sign-in screen, select Service Access Code from the drop-down list.

4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:
● 04075119
Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.
● M856/E85055: 10085619
● M776: 10077619
5. Touch the Print Event Log item.
Clear the event log from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)

Use the following procedure to clear the event log from an LCD control panel.
then select OK.
2. Select Service, and then select OK.
● 04075119
6. Use the down arrow to scroll down to Cancel, and then use the right arrow to highlight the trash can
icon . Select OK to clear the event log.
Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)

Use the following procedure to clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the Service menu.
3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.

● M856/E85055: 10085619
● M776: 10077619
5. Select the Clear Event Log item, and then touch the OK button.

Pre-boot menu options
The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.
● Open the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Remote Admin
CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization for the
entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost.
HP does not recommend this action.
TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See the Remote Admin topic in the Troubleshooting Manual.
Open the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)

Use the following procedure to open the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel.
1. Press the Cancel button when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
2. Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to navigate the Pre-boot menu.
3. Press the OK button to select a menu item.
Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)

Use the following procedure to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.
1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
Figure 2-1 Open the Pre-boot menu
1 2
2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 2-2 Pre-boot menu
Table 2-1 Pre-boot menu button descriptions
Button Description
Use this button to see more information about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu items.
Use this button to go back to the previous menu.
Not used.
Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.
4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).
1 2
2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and then
touch the OK button.
NOTE: The printer will initialize.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel.
2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button to select it.
NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version of the
printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support these options.

Table 2-2 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)
Menu option First level Second level Third level Description
Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu and
continues the normal boot process.
If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds,

the printer returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting
Continue).
If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not

apply.
Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to

open the Pre-boot menu.
Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.
If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed

in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is required to sign in.
Administrator Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download process. A
USB Thumbdrive option will work on all FutureSmart printers.
USB USB or Network connections are not currently supported.
USB Thumbdrive
Administrator Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions.
CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
The system is not bootable after this action and a 99.09.67

error displays on the control panel. A firmware download must
be performed to return the system to a bootable state.
Administrator Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the
firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is
downloaded and saved).
CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data

except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation prompt
is not provided.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations

and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and
settings are lost).
This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the

firmware image from the active directory without having to
download new firmware code (printer remains bootable).
Administrator Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password.
Administrator Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from
the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually
cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the
password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm
the action.
When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK button

to clear the password.

Administrator Manage Disk Clear Disk Select the Clear Disk item to enable using an external device
for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the
(continued) Boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error
is displayed.
Administrator Manage Disk Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to
this printer.
The secure disk already locked to this printer will remain

accessible to this printer. Use this function to have more than
one encrypted disk accessible by the printer when using them
interchangeably.
The data stored on the secure disk locked to this printer always
remains accessible to this printer.
Administrator Manage Disk Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an
unlocked mode for a single service event. The secure disk that
is already locked to this printer will remain accessible to this
printer and uses the old disk's encryption password with the
new disk.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer remains

accessible to this printer.
Administrator Manage Disk Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the non-
secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet-to-
be installed secure disk.
CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.
Administrator Manage Disk Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk for
this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk
in future sessions.
Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk
and unlock it if required.
This might take a long time.
NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system files are
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is a one-pass
overwrite, which erases the entire disk including firmware. The
disk remains an encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all
data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
access to it from any printer.
reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or
get a status about the internal device.
(continued) (continued)
Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
disk and unlock it if required.
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire
disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of
the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the user to gain
reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk is
erased.
Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
Administrator Manage Disk External Device Select the External Device item to erase the external device or
get status about the external device.
Administrator Manage Disk External Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
reinstalled.
The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk,

including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk External Device Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of
the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes
a non-encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk External Device Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [DHCP] The network can be configured to obtain the network
settings from a DHCP server or as static.
(continued) NOTE: This
configuration is only Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the
active when the Pre- DHCP server.
boot menu is open.

Table 2-5 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7) (continued)
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] Use this item to manually assign the network addresses.
NOTE: This
configuration is only
active when the Pre-
boot menu is open.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can
be set for the next time the printer is turned on and
(continued) initializes to the Ready state.
Administrator Startup Options Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision item to
allow the printer to initialize and show the firmware version
when the printer reaches the Ready state.
Once the printer power is turned on the next time, the Show
Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is
not shown.
Administrator Startup Options Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all
customer settings. (This item also returns all settings to
factory defaults.)
NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.
Administrator Startup Options Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third-
party applications.

Administrator Startup Options Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer calibration for the
very next power-initialization cycle only.
Administrator Startup Options Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service
menu access (both in the Pre-Boot menu and the Device
Maintenance menu).
Service personnel must have the administrator remove the

Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu.
Administrator Startup Options Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/ScanVolume
during startup.
Administrator Startup Options First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the printer to
initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.
For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time

settings like date/time, language, and other settings.
Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the
printer power is turned on.
When the printer power is turned on the next time, this item
is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used
during configuration, and the first-time setting prompt is not
used.
Administrator Startup Options Embedded Jetdirect Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the
Off embedded HP Jetdirect.
By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is

always enabled.
Administrator Startup Options WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless
accessory.

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are useful to diagnose hardware

components and their interface connections. Use these
(continued) items to troubleshoot specific hardware components, and
the interface between them and other components.
Administrator Diagnostics Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Memory diagnostic
when executing multiple diagnostics.
Administrator Diagnostics Short Use the Short item to select a brief memory test.
NOTE: This test requires about four minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Long Use the Long item to select an extended memory test.
NOTE: This test requires about twenty minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Disk diagnostic

Administrator Diagnostics Short Use the Short item to select a brief firmware self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about two or three minutes to

execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Long Use the Long item to select an extended firmware self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about sixty minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Optimized Use the Optimized item to select a test that checks the
active sectors on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about thirty minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Raw Use the Raw item to select a test that checks every sector
on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about fifty minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Smart Use the Smart item to select a very brief test that checks the
drive self-monitoring analysis and reporting technology
(SMART) status—the drive detects and reports reliability
indicators to help anticipate disk failures (SMART status).
Administrator Diagnostics CPB Use the CPB item to verify the integrity of the copy
processor board (CPB) and the formatter PCA connections.
Administrator Diagnostics Interconnect Use the Interconnect item to verify the integrity of the
interconnect PCA (ICB) and its connections.
Administrator Diagnostics Run Selected Select the Run Selected item to execute a selected test.
NOTE: If more than one test is selected, they are executed

in sequence.

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to access to
the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to navigate the menu
(continued) selections from a remote location.
IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be initiated by

a person that is physically present at the printer.
This person will also need to provide a randomly generated PIN

to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the Remote Admin

function, see "Remote Admin in the Troubleshooting Manual.
Administrator Remote Admin Stop Telnet
Administrator Remote Admin Refresh IP
Administrator System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the diagnostic
log feature found in the Troubleshooting menu is not accessible,
then use the System Triage item to copy the diagnostic logs to a
USB flash drive at the next printer start up.
The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the problem.

Administrator Change Svc PWD Use this item to change the Service menu personal identification
number (PIN).
Administrator Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number (PIN) has
been changed. Use this item to reset it to the original PIN.
Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator password.
Service Tools Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.
Developer Tools Netexec

Remote Admin
This section describes the following Remote Admin items.
● Required software and network connection
● Connect a remote connection
● Disconnect a remote connection
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The printer
functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any computer (with
telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and interact with the Pre-boot
menu.
IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security reasons
the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the printer.

Required software and network connection
Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed and enabled on
the remote telnet client computer.
● Enable the Windows telnet client
● Network connection
NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a Windows®
operating system.
HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows-based system; however, there are other
operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and configuring the
telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that operating system.
Enable the Windows telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet client
function might not be enabled by default.
NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system. Screens and
menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.
1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.
Figure 2-4 Open the Control Panel

2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.
Figure 2-5 Turn Windows features on or off
3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the box to
select it, and then click the OK button.
TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the Cancel
button.
Figure 2-6 Enable the telnet client feature
Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the printer.
The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote access network
security programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network (VPN)
connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection
Use the following procedures to connect a remote connection.
● Start the telnet server function at the printer from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Start the telnet server function at the printer from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Start the telnet client function at the remote computer
Start the telnet server function at the printer from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.
NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how the
printer is configured.
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Press the Cancel button when the 1/8 displays under the HP logo on the control panel display.
3. Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item, and
then select OK.
Figure 2-7 Select the +3:Administrator item
4. Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item, and
then select OK.
Figure 2-8 Select the +A:Remote Admin item
5. Use the arrow buttons on the control panel to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and then
select OK.
Figure 2-9 Select the 1:Start Telnet item
6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.
Figure 2-10 Telnet connecting message
● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.
Figure 2-11 Telnet error message
1. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.
2. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.
○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use DHCP
instead.
○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.
3. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.
7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the information on
this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.
NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.
● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.
● Port: The standard telnet port (23).
● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
Figure 2-12 Telnet server function initialized
Start the telnet server function at the printer from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how the
printer is configured.
1. Turn the printer on.
2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a 1/8 with an underscore displays, touch the
middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.
3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 2-13 Select the +3:Administrator item
4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 2-14 Select the +A:Remote Admin item
5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and then
touch the OK button to select it.
Figure 2-15 Select the 1:Start Telnet item
6. Do one of the following
● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.
Figure 2-16 Telnet connecting message
● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Figure 2-17 Telnet error message
1. Check the printer network cable and make sure it is correctly connected.
2. Verify that the BIOS LAN settings are correct.
○ If the printer should be configured to use a static IP address, make sure it is not configured
to use DHCP instead.
○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, make sure the IP address is correct.
3. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.
7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the information on
this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.
NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.
● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.
● Port: The standard telnet port (23).
● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
Figure 2-18 Telnet server function initialized
Start the telnet client function at the remote computer
The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.
1. From the Start menu select Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then select the OK
button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 2-19 Open a command window
2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 2-20 Start a telnet session
3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.
NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed when following the
instructions in the Starting the telnet server function at the printer in the Troubleshooting manual.
TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall or on a
different network that the remote telnet client computer. See the Network connection section in the
Troubleshooting manual.
Figure 2-21 Establish a telnet connection

4. At the prompt, type the PIN that was displayed when following the instructions in the Starting the telnet
server function at the printer in the Troubleshooting manual. Press the Enter key.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer terminates
the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the printer. See the
Starting the telnet server function at the printer section in the Troubleshooting manual.
Figure 2-22 Enter the PIN
5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see the Pre-boot menu options section
in the Troubleshooting manual.
NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection, the
following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.
● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.
● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.
Figure 2-23 Remote Admin window
Disconnect a remote connection
The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet client
computer.
NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote telnet
client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.
Figure 2-24 Access the administrator menu
2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press the
Enter key.
Figure 2-25 Access the remote admin menu
3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the Enter
key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer terminates.
IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present at the
printer do the following:
● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 2-26 Terminate the telnet connection

Troubleshooting process
Review the following information about the troubleshooting process.
● Determine the problem source
● Power subsystem
● Control panel checks

Determine the problem source
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts the user to
the situation.
● Pre-troubleshooting checklist
● Troubleshooting flowchart
This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flow chart to filter out many possible
causes of the problem.
● Use the pre-troubleshooting check list to gather information about the problem from the customer.
● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart
guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:
● Are supply items within their rated life?
● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?
● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition.
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The following table includes basic questions to ask the customer to quickly help define the problem(s).
Table 2-9 Pre-troubleshooting checklist

General topic Questions
Environment ● Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface (+/- 1°)?
● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?
● Is the power-supply plug inserted in the printer and the wall outlet (not a surge
protector)?
● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters?
● Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or
office cleaning materials?
NOTE: Diazo copiers produce ammonia gas as part of the copying processes.
Ammonia gas (from cleaning supplies or a diazo copier) can have an adverse effect on
some printer components (for example, the toner cartridge or cartridges OPC).
● Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?
● Is the printer exposed to an air conditioning or heating vent that can cause
temperature fluctuations?
Media ● Does the customer use only supported media?
● Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, or distortion)?
● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?
ENWW Troubleshooting process 151

Table 2-9 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)
General topic Questions
Input trays ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?
● Is the media correctly placed in the tray?
● Are the paper guides aligned with the stack (no gaps in the stack or excessive
pressure causing the stack to bow)?
● Is the tray (or trays) correctly installed in the printer?
Toner cartridge ● Are the toner cartridges installed correctly?
● Are the toner cartridges genuine HP cartridges?
Transfer unit and fuser ● Are the transfer unit and fuser installed correctly?
NOTE: For printers with an intermediate transfer belt (ITB), is the ITB installed
correctly and fully seated. If a replacement ITB was installed, was all of the packing
materials removed?
Covers ● Is the toner cartridge door closed?
Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter

following cold storage)? If so, wipe affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10 to
20 minutes.
● Was a toner cartridge (or cartridges) opened soon after being moved from a cold to a
warm room? If so, allow the toner cartridge (or cartridges) to sit at room temperature
for 1 to 2 hours.
Miscellaneous ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (toner cartridges, memory modules,
and EIO cards) from the printer.
● Remove the printer from the network and ensure that the failure is associated with
the printer before beginning troubleshooting.
● For any color print-quality issues (color printers only), calibrate the printer, and then
print a diagnostics page to verify print quality.
Troubleshooting flowchart
This flowchart highlights the general processes to follow to quickly isolate and solve printer hardware problems.
Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. Follow a “yes” answer to a question to proceed to the next major
step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this chapter, and
follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in this troubleshooting
flowchart.
Table 2-10 Troubleshooting flowchart

Step Question Action
1 Is the printer on and does a readable Yes: Go to step 2.

message display?
Power on No:
● Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks.
● After the control panel display is functional, go to step 2.

Table 2-10 Troubleshooting flowchart (continued)
Step Question Action
2 Does the message Ready display on Yes: Go to step 3.

the control panel?
Control panel No: After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.
messages
3 Open the Troubleshooting menu and Yes: Go to step 4.

print an event log to see the history
Event log of errors with this printer. No:
Does the event log print? ● If the event log does not print, check for error messages.
● If paper jams inside the printer, see the jams section of the printer
service manual.
● If error messages display on the control panel when trying to print an

event log, see the control panel message section of the printer
troubleshooting service manual.
● After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, go to step 4.
4 Open the Reports menu and print the Yes: Go to step 5.

configuration pages to verify that all
Information the accessories are installed. No:
pages
Are all the accessories installed? ● If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page,
remove the accessory and reinstall it.
● After evaluating the configuration pages, go to step 5.
5 Does the print quality meet the Yes: Go to step 6.

customer's requirements?
Print quality No:
● Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect
tables. See the images defects table in the printer repair service
manual.
● After the print quality is acceptable, go to step 6.
6 Can the customer print successfully Yes: This is the end of the troubleshooting process.
from the host computer?
Interface No:
● Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid
IP address is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page.
● If error messages display on the control panel when trying to print an

event log, see the control-panel message section of the printer
troubleshooting service manual.
● When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of
the troubleshooting process.

Power subsystem
Review the following information about the power subsystem.
● Power-on checks

Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and the power
switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and
solve the problem.
● Power-on troubleshooting overview
If the control panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control panel
display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.

Power-on troubleshooting overview
Perform troubleshooting steps to isolate power-on failures.
● Troubleshooting power on problems
● Troubleshooting a blank control-panel display
During normal operation, cooling fans begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place a hand
over the vents in the left-side or rear cover. If the fans are operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer.
You can lean close to the printer and hear the fans operating. If the fans are operating, the DC-side of the power
supply is functioning.
After the fans are operating, the main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a
jam condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly
determine if the main motor is turned on.
If the fans and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.
Troubleshooting power on problems
Use the following procedure to troubleshoot power on problems.
If the control panel is blank when you turn on the printer, check the following items.
1. Verify that power is available to the printer. If the printer is plugged into a surge protector or uninterruptible
power supply (UPS), remove it. Plug the printer directly into a known operating wall receptacle (make sure
that the wall receptacle provides the correct voltage and current for the printer).
Unplug any other devices on the same circuit that the printer is using.
2. Try another known operating wall receptacle and a different power cord.
3. Make sure that the power cord is securely connected to the printer and the wall outlet.
4. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the heartbeat LED on the
formatter is blinking.
5. Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected.
6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.
7. To eliminate a thermal switch issue, unplug the power cord and leave it unplugged for over 20 minutes. Re-
attach the power cord, and then turn the power on again.
Troubleshooting a blank control-panel display
Learn how to troubleshoot a blank control-panel display.
Customers usually report that the control panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to collect as
much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.
Following are some printer behaviors that might be reported by a customer as a blank control-panel display:
● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or backlight).
● The control panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.
● The control panel is blank, LEDs are on or flashing, the back light is on, but no text is visible.

Following are some possible causes of a blank control panel display:
● No power to the printer.
● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.
● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller.
● The memory DIMM is missing, faulty, incorrectly installed, or is not fully seated.
● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, network PCA, USB device,
or other component).
● The formatter is defective.
● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.
● The DC controller is defective.
Following are some areas to explore with a customer reporting a blank display:
● Was the printer newly installed or has the printer been properly functioning? If the printer was newly-
installed, as the customer if they noticed any damage to the shipping box or any damage to the printer.
● What happened just prior to the control-panel display going blank?
– Was the printer recently serviced?
– Did a power outage recently occur?
– Did a lightning storm recently occur?
– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?
– Was firmware recently upgraded?
● Is the control panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?
● Is the control panel display back light on?
Recommended actions:
If the control panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light), check to see if the printer is
getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on. If there are no
signs of power, then perform the following:
1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.
TIP: Try using a different power cable, if possible.
2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power supply is
operational).
3. Turn the printer power off.
4. Make sure that the control panel display wire harness and flat cable (if applicable) are properly connected
and fully seated, and then turn the printer power on again.
5. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control panel display is blank.

6. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.
NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely due to a defective control panel.
7. Log into the Embedded Web Server (EWS) and check to see if the remote control panel will load.
8. Run the control panel diagnostics.
9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot and is
fully seated.
10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive, solid-state
drive, memory DIMMs, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).
11. Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.
12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control panel display.
13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.
CAUTION: Turn the printer power off before removing or installing components.
14. If the control panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, replace the
formatter.

Control panel checks
Review the following information about control panel checks.
● Control panel diagnostics (M856/E85055 and M776)
NOTE: The printer includes a diagnostic test mode for the touchscreen control panels. Diagnostic tests are not
available for the LCD control panel.

Control panel diagnostics (M856/E85055 and M776)
Review the following information about the control panel diagnostics.
● Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M856/E85055 and M776)
● Control panel system diagnostics (M856/E85055/M776)
● Control panel diagnostic flowcharts (M856/E85055/M776)
Touchscreen diagnostic mode (M856/E85055 and M776)
Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control panel hardware and embedded firmware.
These tests are useful for checking control panel functionality independent of the printer control panel system
diagnostics. To test the control panel using the system diagnostics, see "Control panel system diagnostics
(M856/E85055)" in the Troubleshooting Manual.
1. M856/E85055 only: Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 2-27 Diagnostic-tests access button (M856/E85055)

2. M856/E85055 only: Press the diagnostics-access button. Repeatedly pressing the button cycles through
the available diagnostics.
NOTE: A pen, pencil, or other small blunt object is needed to press the button.
TIP: When pressed, the button illuminates green.
Figure 2-28 Press the diagnostics-access button (M856/E85055)
3. M776 only: Locate the diagnostic-tests access button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 2-29 Diagnostic-tests access button (M776)

4. M776 only: Press the diagnostics-access button. Repeatedly pressing the button cycles through the
available diagnostics.
Figure 2-30 Press the diagnostics-access button (M776)
5. A yellow screen appears (after the first press of the button) indicating that the control panel firmware is
version A (a magenta screen indicates version B firmware).
NOTE: If a different color appears on the screen, contact your global business unit (GBU) to determine the
firmware version.
TIP: After 4 seconds of inactivity, the diagnostic mode times out and is exited.
Figure 2-31 Control panel version A yellow screen
6. Touch the screen to cycle the screen through the following:
● A red screen.

● A green screen.
● A blue screen.
● Five brightness levels of a white screen.
● A final black screen.
TIP: When the final black screen displays, press the Home button to cycle through the diagnostic
screens and test its functionality.

7. Pressing the diagnostic-tests button with the black screen displayed exits the diagnostic mode.

Control panel system diagnostics (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the diagnostics in this section to test the control panel hardware and display using the printer firmware
system diagnostics.
● Open the control panel system diagnostic tests
● Screen test
● Touch test
● SoftKey test
● Backlight test
● Sound test
● Keyboard test (M776z/zs only)
● Version
Open the control panel system diagnostic tests
Use the following procedure to open the control panel system diagnostics tests from a touchscreen control
panel.
1. Turn the printer power off, and then on again.
2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
1 2
3. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 2-33 Pre-boot menu
Table 2-11 Pre-boot menu button descriptions
Button Description
Use this button to see more information about a selected item.
Use this button to scroll up through menu items.
Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.
Use this button to scroll down through menu items.
Use this button to go back to the previous menu.
Not used.
Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +3 Administration, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 2-34 Access the administration menu
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to +E CP Diagnostics, and then press the OK button to select it.
NOTE: An administrator password might be required to continue.
Figure 2-35 Access the diagnostics menu
Screen test
Use the following procedure to perform a screen test.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests. See "Open the control panel systems diagnostic tests" in
the Troubleshooting Manual.

2. With 1 Screen Test highlighted, press the OK button to select it.
Figure 2-36 Open the screen test
The blue vertical gradient screen appears.
Figure 2-37 Blue vertical gradient screen
3. Touch the touchscreen to scroll though the remaining touchscreen test screens.
NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.

Table 2-12 Touchscreen test screens
Screen Description
Green vertical gradient
Red vertical gradient
Blue horizontal gradient
Green horizontal gradient
Red horizontal gradient
Blue with black horizontal interlaced

Table 2-12 Touchscreen test screens (continued)
Screen Description
Green with black horizontal interlaced
Red with black horizontal interlaced
Blue with black vertical interlaced
Green with black vertical interlaced
Red with black vertical interlaced
Black with white center

Table 2-12 Touchscreen test screens (continued)
Screen Description
White with black center
Checkerboard
Multicolor stripes
Blue green grid meshing
Touch test
Use the following procedure to perform a touch test.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 2 Touch Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 2-38 Open the touch test

3. Use your finger to touch the white grid on the display.
Figure 2-39 Touch the white grid
A mark appears on the grid where it was touched.
NOTE: Touch the Home button to exit the test.
Figure 2-40 Verify the mark
SoftKey test
Use the following procedure to perform a SoftKey test.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 3 SoftKey Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 2-41 Open the softkey test

3. When prompted, touch the Home button.
Figure 2-42 Touch the Home button
If the test is successful, the following screen appears on the display.
NOTE: Touch the screen to exit the test.
Figure 2-43 Successful test
Backlight test
Use the following procedure to perform a backlight test.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 4 Backlight Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
After selecting the 4 Backlight Test, the screen automatically dims, and then returns to full brightness.
NOTE: Touch any key to exit the test.
Figure 2-44 Open the backlight test
Sound test
Use the following procedure to perform a sound test.

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 5 Sound Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
After selecting the 5 Sound Test, the printer emits a series of audible tones.
Figure 2-45 Open the sound test
Keyboard test (M776z/zs only)
Use the following procedure to perform a keyboard test on M776z/zs printers only.
IMPORTANT: The control panel system diagnostic tests include a 6 Keyboard Test item. This test is not valid for
the M856/E85055/M776dn printers even though this option is present in the control panel system diagnostic
tests menu.
If the 6 Keyboard Test is opened on the M856/E85055/M776dn printers, the printer power must be turned off to
exit the test.
HP does not recommend turning the printer power off during the control panel system diagnostic tests.
1. Open the control panel system diagnostic tests. See the control panel system diagnostics test section in

2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 6 Keyboard Test, and then press the OK button to select it.
Figure 2-46 Do not open the keyboard test except for M776z/zs printers
3. When prompted, touch the H key on the keyboard or the Home button to exit the test.
Version
Use the following procedure to view the control panel version information.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to 7 Version, and then press the OK button to select it.
NOTE: The following types of information are for the control panel only, not the printer.
● Panel ID
● Hardware (version)
● Firmware (version)
● KB Hw (version)
● KB Firm (version)
● LCD Vendor
● Touch Controller Version

Figure 2-47 Open the version information

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.
● Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
● No control panel sound
● Home button is unresponsive
● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.
Figure 2-48 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display
(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)
Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.
Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.
Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?
Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y
Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.
Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N
Replace the
control panel.
Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Figure 2-49 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone
Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?
Open the
Perform the
touch test.
Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?
Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.
Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?
Do not replace the

control panel.
No control panel sound


Figure 2-50 No control panel sound
Control panel
has no
sound
Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save
Can sounds
be heard?
N
Y
Open the
Perform the sound test.
Can sounds
be heard?
Y
N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?
Home button is unresponsive

Figure 2-51 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illumated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
tunr the power off, and
then on agian.
Open the
Perform the Home
button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Turn the product power off,

and then on again.
Open the
Perform the
Home button test.
Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y
Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.
Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Review the following information when the HIP is not functioning, but the control panel is functional.

Figure 2-52 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)
Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)
Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Tools for troubleshooting
Learn about tools that can help to solve printer problems.
● Individual component diagnostics
● Diagrams
● Internal test and information pages
● Control panel menus
● Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 185

Individual component diagnostics
Learn about individual component diagnostics available on the printer.
● LED diagnostics
● Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics
● Paper path and sensor diagnostic tests
● Print/stop test
● Component tests

LED diagnostics
LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.
● Understand lights on the formatter

Understand lights on the formatter
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate whether the printer is functioning correctly.
● Heartbeat LED
● HP Jetdirect LEDs
Figure 2-53 Formatter LED lights
Table 2-13 Formatter LED lights
Callout Description
1 Heartbeat LED
2 HP Jetdirect LEDs
Heartbeat LED
The heartbeat LED indicates whether the formatter is functioning correctly.
While the printer is initializing after it is turned on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the printer
has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.
The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation while the printer is executing the firmware boot
process.
NOTE: When the initialization process completes, the heartbeat LED should be illuminated solid green.
Table 2-14 Heartbeat LED, product initialization

Product initializing state Heartbeat LED, normal state Heartbeat LED, error state
No power (power cable disconnected or Off Not applicable

power switch off)

Table 2-14 Heartbeat LED, product initialization (continued)
Power on (immediately after the power Red, solid Red, solid

switch is pressed)
● Duration should be 1 second or less ● Firmware error; problem finding
hardware and booting the serial
peripheral interface flash memory
– Boot process halted
Replace the formatter.
Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash Green, solid Red, solid

memory boot
● Firmware error; problem with corrupt
or missing SPI flash memory
HW checks on-board DRAM Green, solid Red, solid
● Power-on self-check failure
Control panel connection initializes Green, solid Yellow, fast flash
NOTE: Control panel communication is ● Formatter to control panel connection

successful. If an error occurs, a message failed
should appear on the control panel display.
– Boot process continues
Check the cables between the formatter

and control panel for damage. Make sure
that the cables are fully seated.
Pre-boot menu available (including Green, solid Red, solid

diagnostics)
● Diagnostic failure
– Follow diagnostic instructions.
Turn the power off, and then on again to

restart the initialization process.
Accessing disk for firmware image Green, solid Yellow, fast flash
NOTE: If applicable, disk error messages ● Control panel not connected

appear on the control panel display.
Firmware boot Green, solid Yellow, fast flash
NOTE: If applicable, error messages ● Control panel not connected

Product operational Green, heartbeat blink Yellow, fast flash
NOTE: If applicable, error messages ● Control panel not connected


Table 2-14 Heartbeat LED, product initialization (continued)
49.XX.YY error or initialization freezes Not applicable LED off
NOTE: An error message (for example,

49.XX.YY) might appear on the control panel
display.
Eventually, a formatter connection missing

message will appear.
Turn the power off, and then on again to

restart the initialization process.
If the error persists, perform a firmware

upgrade.
Control panel connection interrupted after Not applicable Yellow, fast flash
the product is operational
● Control panel not connected
Flat, flexible cable (FFC) between the Not applicable Yellow, solid
formatter and DC controller is not
connected or damaged ● Formatter to DC controller connection
failed
Check the cable between the formatter and

DC controller for damage. Make sure that
the cable is fully seated.
Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Not applicable
Approaching Sleep Mode Green, slow blink Not applicable
Wake up from Sleep Mode Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression
Approaching wake up from Sleep Mode Follows initialization progression Follows initialization progression
The following table describes the heartbeat LED operation when the printer completes the firmware boot
process and is in the Ready state.
Table 2-15 Heartbeat LED, printer operational

LED color Description
Green ● Normal operation
– Formatter is operating normally
– Firmware is operating normally
– Control panel is connected
Yellow ● Formatter cannot connect to the control panel
– Check control panel connections
– Verify control panel functionality
Red ● Formatter error or failure

Table 2-15 Heartbeat LED, printer operational (continued)
LED color Description
– Serial peripheral interface (SPI) flash memory boot error
– Power on self-test (formatter) failed
– Diagnostic (formatter) failed
Off TIP: The heartbeat LED is off if the power cable is disconnected, the printer power switch is in the off
position, or the printer is in Sleep Mode.
● Firmware or system freeze
– Check control panel for an error message
– Control panel failure
NOTE: This condition is not usually caused by a formatter failure. Turn the power off, and then on again. If
the error persists, perform a firmware upgrade.
HP Jetdirect LEDs
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green
LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has
failed.
For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link settings
on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Settings, and then
select OK.
1. Networking
2. Ethernet
3. Link Speed
3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics
The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path,
noise, assembly, and timing issues.
● Engine test button
● Defeating interlocks
● Disable cartridge check
Engine test button
To verify that the printer engine is functioning, print an engine test page.
Use a small pointed object to depress the test-page switch located on the rear side of the printer. The test page
should have a series of lines that are parallel to the long end of the page. The test page can use only Tray 2 as
the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2.
NOTE: Depressing, and holding down, the test-page switch causes the printer to continually print test pages.
Releasing the switch stops the test page continuous printing.
Figure 2-54 Engine test button

Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the diagnostic
test when the front door or right door is open.
● Defeat the front door interlocks
Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).
WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel
should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is
turned on.
Defeat the front door interlocks
Use the following procedure to defeat the front door interlocks.
1. Open the front door.
2. Insert folded pieces of paper into two slots (callout 1).
Figure 2-55 Defeat the front door interlocks

Disable cartridge check
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when the toner cartridge is
removed or exchanged. Supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode.
● Disable cartridge check from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Disable cartridge check from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
When the printer is in this mode, access the troubleshooting menus and print internal pages (the print quality
pages will be the most useful). This test can be used to isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate print-
quality problems that are related to the toner cartridge.
NOTE: Do not remove or exchange the toner cartridge until after beginning the disable cartridge check
diagnostic.
Disable cartridge check from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to disable cartridge check from an LCD control panel.
then press the OK button.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Troubleshooting, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Diagnostic Tests, and then press the OK button.
4. Select Continue to enter Maintenance Mode.
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Disable Cartridge Check, and then press the OK button to select it.
Disable cartridge check from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to disable cartridge check from a touchscreen control panel.
a. Troubleshooting
b. Diagnostic Tests
c. Disable Cartridge Check

Paper path and sensor diagnostic tests
Review the following information about the paper path and sensor diagnostics tests.
● Paper path test
● Paper path sensors test
● Manual sensor tests

Paper path test
This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages. Use these pages to isolate the cause of jams.
● Access the paper path test from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Access the paper path test from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path (duplex models
only), and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent
problems. The following options become available after beginning the diagnostic feature:
● Number of Copies: Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500.
● Paper Tray: Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.
● Output Sides: Choose 1-sided or 2-sided.
Access the paper path test from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to access the paper path test from an LCD control panel.
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Paper Path Test, and then press the OK button.
Access the paper path test from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to access the paper path test from a touchscreen control panel.
1. Troubleshooting
2. Diagnostic Tests
3. Paper Path Test
3. Select the paper path test options for the test.

Paper path sensors test
This test displays the status of each paper-path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing
internal pages.
● Access the paper path sensors test from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Access the paper path sensors test from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Access the paper path sensors test from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to access the paper path sensors test from a touchscreen control panel.
1. Troubleshooting
2. Diagnostic Tests
3. Paper Path Sensors
3. Touch Start to run the test.
Access the paper path sensors test from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to access the paper path sensors test from an LCD control panel.
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Paper Path Sensors, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: Exiting the Paper Path Sensors menu and then reentering the test will clear the test values from the
previous test.
The menu list of sensors and switches for the Paper Path Sensors test varies depending on which optional
accessories are installed.
For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on the
number of accessories installed.
Table 2-16 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests

Sensor name Sensor/Switch Replacement part number Description
number
Registration sensor SR8 RM2-1393-010CN Paper pickup assembly (M751/E75245)
RM2-3908-000CN Paper pickup assembly (M856/E85055/M776)

Table 2-16 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests (continued)
Sensor name Sensor/Switch Replacement part number Description

number
Fuser loop sensor 1 SR16 3WT87-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 110V)
3WT88-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 220V)
4YL16-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 110V)
4YL17-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 220V)
Fuser loop sensor 2 SR26 3WT87-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 110V)
3WT88-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 220V)
4YL16-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 110V)
4YL17-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 220V)
Fuser exit sensor 1 SR7 3WT87-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 110V)
3WT88-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 220V)
4YL16-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 110V)
4YL17-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 220V)
Paper width sensor 1 SR9 RM2-1393-010CN Paper pickup assembly (M751/E75245)
Full sensor SR41 RM2-1498-000CN Delivery assembly (M751/E75245)
RM2-1777-000CN Delivery assembly (M856/E85055, M776dn/M776z)
RM2-1786-000CN Delivery assembly (M776zs)
ITB alienation sensor SR42 WG8-5935-000CN IC, photointerrupter
Fuser pressure release SR44 RM2-1391-000CN Fuser drive assembly

sensor

Manual sensor tests
The table in this section lists the sensors and switches available in the manual sensor tests.
● Access the manual sensor test from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Access the manual sensor test from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Access the manual sensor test from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to access the manual sensor test from a touchscreen control panel.
a. Troubleshooting
b. Diagnostic Tests
c. Sensors
3. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control panel display to verify the sensor state (active or
inactive) and the number of times it was activated..
Access the manual sensor test from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to access the manual sensor test from an LCD control panel.
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Manual Sensor Test, and then press the OK button.
6. Activate the desired sensor, and then check the control panel display to verify the sensor state (active or
inactive) and the number of times it was activated..
NOTE: For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on
the number and type of accessories installed.
Table 2-17 Manual sensor diagnostic tests

Sensor or switch Replacement Part number Description
SR15 Tray 1 empty sensor RM2-1494-000CN Right door assembly (M751/E75245)
RM2-3434-000CN Right door assembly (M856/E85055/M776)
SR14 Last page sensor RM2-1494-000CN Right door assembly (M751/E75245)
RM2-3434-000CN Right door assembly (M856/E85055/M776)
SR6 Tray 2 empty sensor RM2-1393-010CN Paper pickup assembly (M751/E75245)

Table 2-17 Manual sensor diagnostic tests (continued)
Sensor or switch Replacement Part number Description
SR41 Full sensor RM2-1498-000CN Delivery assembly (M751/E75245)
RM2-1777-000CN Delivery assembly (M856/E85055, M776dn/M776z)
RM2-1786-000CN Delivery assembly (M776zs)
SW4 Right door switch RM2-1445-000CN Low-voltage power supply (M751/E75245; 110V)
RM2-1453-000CN Low-voltage power supply (M751/E75245; 220V)
RM2-2473-000CN Low-voltage power supply (M856/E85055/M776; 110V)
RM2-2474-000CN Low-voltage power supply (M856/E85055/M776; 220V)
SR8 Registration sensor RM2-1393-010CN Paper pickup assembly (M751/E75245)
SR16 Fuser loop sensor 1 3WT87-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 110V)
3WT88-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 220V)
4YL16-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 110V)
4YL17-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 220V)
SR7 Fuser exit sensor 3WT87-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 110V)
3WT88-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 220V)
4YL16-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 110V)
4YL17-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 220V)
SR9 Paper width sensor 1 RM2-1393-010CN Paper pickup assembly (M751/E75245)
SR26 Fuser loop sensor2 3WT87-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 110V)
3WT88-67901 Fuser (M751/E75245; 220V)
4YL16-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 110V)
4YL17-67901 Fuser (M856/E85055/M776; 220V)

Print/stop test
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the
engine.
● Access the print/stop test from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Access the print/stop test from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
During this test, stop the paper anywhere along the printer paper path. The test can be programmed to stop
printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be
programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, the
printer can recover in one of two ways.
● After the print job is completed press the OK button to return to the Troubleshooting menu before the
timer times out.
● After the timer times out, touch the Stop button. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it
to a normal state.
Access the print/stop test from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to access the print/stop test from a touchscreen control panel.
1. Troubleshooting
2. Diagnostic Tests
3. Print/Stop Test
3. Enter a range, and then touch the OK button.
Access the print/stop test from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to access the print/stop test from an LCD control panel.
FutureSmart 4
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Print/Stop Test, and then press the OK button.

Component tests
Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.
● Access the individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Access the individual component diagnostics from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Access the individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to access individual component diagnostics from a touchscreen control panel.
1. Troubleshooting
2. Diagnostic Tests
3. Component Test
3. Select the component test options for the test.
Access the individual component diagnostics from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to access the individual component diagnostics from an LCD control panel.
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Component Test, and then press the OK button.
6. Select the component and desired options.
7. Select Start to start the test.
8. Select Stop to stop the test.
NOTE: For trays other than Tray 1 or Tray 2, the tray number associated with a sensor or switch depends on
the number and type of accessories installed.
Table 2-18 Component test details

Component test Item tested Comments
Yellow drum motor M2 Activates the specified motor
Magenta drum motor M2 Activates the specified motor
Cyan drum motor M2 Activates the specified motor
Black drum motor M3 Activates the specified motor
Yellow developer motor M1 Activates the specified motor

Table 2-18 Component test details (continued)
Component test Item tested Comments
Magenta developer motor M1 Activates the specified motor
Cyan developer motor M1 Activates the specified motor
Black developer motor M3 Activates the specified motor
ITB motor M3 Activates the specified motor
Alienation motor M6 Activates the specified motor
ITB contact/alienation motor M6 Activates the specified motor
Tray 2 pickup motor M5 Activates the specified motor
Fuser motor M4 Activates the specified motor
Fuser pressure release motor M4 Activates the specified motor
Fuser shutter motor M25 Activates the specified motor
Duplex motor M24 Activates the specified motor
Tray 1 pickup solenoid SL3 Activates the specified solenoid
Tray 2 pickup clutch CL1 Activates the specified clutch
Duplex re-feed clutch CL2 Activates the specified clutch
Switchback flapper solenoid SL8 Activates the specified solenoid
Laser scanner motor M7 Activates the specified motor

Diagrams
Use the diagrams in this section to identify printer components.
● Block diagrams
● External plug and port locations
● Locations of major assemblies
● General timing chart
● General circuit diagrams

Block diagrams
Use the diagrams in this section to identify printer sensors, switches, and assemblies.
● Cross-section diagrams
● Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations
Cross-section diagrams
Review the following information about the cross-section diagrams.
Figure 2-56 Printer cross-section diagram (1 of 2; M751/E75245)

1 2 3 4
Table 2-19 Printer cross-section diagram (1 of 2; M751/E75245)
1 Photosensitive drum 3 ITB cleaning roller
2 ITB cleaning assembly 4 T1 roller

Figure 2-57 Printer cross-section diagram (2 of 2; M751/E75245)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 12 10 8
13 11 9
Table 2-20 Printer cross-section diagram (2 of 2; M751/E75245)
1 ITB 8 Tray 1 pickup roller
2 Fuser film 9 Tray 1 separation roller
3 Pressure roller 10 Intermediate feed roller
4 Secondary transfer roller 11 Tray 2 separation roller
5 Registration density sensor 12 Tray 2 feed roller
6 Media sensor 13 Tray 2 pickup roller
7 Duplex re-pickup roller 14 Registration roller

Figure 2-58 Printer cross-section diagram (1 of 3; M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
4 5 6
1 2 3
13 12 11 10
1 9 8 7
Table 2-21 Printer cross-section diagram (1 of 3; M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
1 Photosensitive drum 8 Tray 1 separation roller
2 ITB cleaning roller 9 Intermediate feed roller
3 T1 roller 10 Tray 2 separation roller
4 ITB drive roller 11 Tray 2 feed roller
5 T2 roller 12 Tray 2 pickup roller
7 Tray 1 pickup roller N/A N/A

4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3
15 14 13 12 11 10
1
1 Toner collection unit (TCU) 9 Registration shutter
2 ITB cleaning assembly 10 Tray 2
3 ITB 11 Laser scanner assembly
4 Duplex flapper 12 Black toner cartridge
5 Fuser 13 Cyan toner cartridge
6 Color sensor 14 Magenta toner cartridge
7 Registration density sensor 15 Yellow toner cartridge
8 Media sensor N/A N/A

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3
1 Imaging drum 7 Fuser film
2 Output upper roller 8 Pressure roller
3 Switchback feed roller 9 Duplex feed roller 1
4 Switchback output roller 10 Duplex feed roller 2
5 Decurl hard roller 11 Duplex feed roller 3
6 Decurl soft roller N/A N/A

Figure 2-61 Printer cross-section diagram (1 of 3; M776zs)
4 5 6
1 2 3
13 12 11 10
1 9 8 7
Table 2-24 Printer cross-section diagram (1 of 3; M776zs)
1 Photosensitive drum 8 Tray 1 separation roller
2 ITB cleaning roller 9 Intermediate feed roller
3 T1 roller 10 Tray 2 separation roller
4 ITB drive roller 11 Tray 2 feed roller

Table 2-24 Printer cross-section diagram (1 of 3; M776zs) (continued)
5 T2 roller 12 Tray 2 pickup roller
7 Tray 1 pickup roller N/A N/A

4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3
15 14 13 12 11 10
1

1 Toner collection unit (TCU) 9 Registration shutter
2 ITB cleaning assembly 10 Tray 2
3 ITB 11 Laser scanner assembly
4 Duplex flapper 12 Black toner cartridge
5 Fuser 13 Cyan toner cartridge
6 Color sensor 14 Magenta toner cartridge
7 Registration density sensor 15 Yellow toner cartridge
8 Media sensor N/A N/A

5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4
1 Imaging drum 7 Decurl soft roller
2 Fuser film 8 Pressure roller
3 Decurl hard roller 9 Duplex feed roller 1
4 Output feed roller 1 10 Duplex feed roller 2
5 Output upper roller 11 Duplex feed roller 3
6 Output feed roller 2 N/A N/A

Figure 2-64 Inner finisher cross-section diagram (M776zs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table 2-27 Inner finisher cross-section diagram (M776zs)
1 Output bin 6 Return roller
2 Media retainer 7 Assist guide
3 Paddle 8 Stapler
4 Alignment plate 9 Entrance feed roller
5 Output roller N/A N/A
Figure 2-65 550-sheet paper tray cross-section diagram

1 2 3 4
Table 2-28 550-sheet paper tray cross-section diagram

Item Description
1 Tray pickup roller
2 Tray feed roller

Table 2-28 550-sheet paper tray cross-section diagram (continued)
Item Description
3 Feed roller
4 Tray separation roller
Figure 2-66 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand cross-section diagram

1 2 3 4
Table 2-29 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand cross-section diagram
Item Description
1 Tray pickup roller
2 Feed roller
3 Tray feed roller
4 Tray separation roller

Figure 2-67 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand cross-section diagram
1 2 4 3 1 2 5 6 3
Table 2-30 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand cross-section diagram
1 Tray pickup roller 4 Feed roller 2
2 Tray feed roller 5 Feed roller 3
3 Tray separation roller 6 Feed roller 1

Printed circuit assembly (PCA) connector locations
Use the diagrams in this section to identify printer PCA connector locations.
● DC controller connections
● Inner finisher PCA connections (M776zs)
● Formatter connections
DC controller connections
Each of the connections on the DC controller PCA is indicated in the following figure.
Figure 2-68 DC controller PCA connectors

J151 J153 J183 J154
J185
J156 J164
J2201 J140
J158 J189
J138
J135
J157
J191 J130
J184
J188
J131
J133
J152
J187
J139
J122
J159
J201
J141
J181 J103
SW301
J182 J106
J121
J102 J112
J113 J123
Table 2-31 DC controller PCA connectors

J102 Low-voltage power supply J153 Front door switch
Pre-exposure LED 1 to 4

Table 2-31 DC controller PCA connectors (continued)
J103 Low-voltage power supply J154 Drum motor 1
Drum motor 2
Drum motor 3
Drum home position sensor CMY
Drum home position sensor K
Developer alienation sensor
T1 roller alienation solenoid
J106 5V interlock switch J156 High-voltage power supply A

PCA
Duplex fan
J112 T2 high-voltage power supply J157 Duplex flapper solenoid

PCA
Duplex switchback motor
J113 High-voltage power supply B J158 Fuser fan

PCA
Cartridge front fan
Cartridge rear fan
ITB toner collection near full

sensor
Residual toner feed screw

rotation sensor
Environment sensor
ITB toner collection unit

presence switch
J121 Laser scanner assembly J159 E-label
J122 Laser scanner assembly J181 T2 connecting PCA
J123 Laser scanner assembly J182 T2 connecting PCA
J130 Media sensor J183 Fan shutter motor
Fan shutter sensor
J131 Media sensor J185 Fuser pressure release sensor
Fuser loop sensor 1 T1 roller home position sensor
Tray 1 media out sensor
Tray 1 last media sensor
Tray 1 pickup solenoid
J133 Input accessory J187 Right door switch
J135 Registration density sensor J188 Fuser loop sensor 2

assembly

Table 2-31 DC controller PCA connectors (continued)
J138 Lifter motor J189 FD1 media full sensor
Tray 2 media level sensor
Tray 2 media width size switch
Tray 2 media length size switch
J139 Tray 2 media surface sensor J191 Tray 2 pickup clutch
Tray 2 media out sensor Duplex re-pickup clutch
Registration sensor
Registration media width sensor

1

3

2
Feed motor
J151 Fuser relay PCA J201 Formatter
J152 Fuser motor SW301 Test print switch
Figure 2-69 550-sheet feeder PCA connectors
J100 J201
J101
J102
J202
J303 J305 J302 J301
Table 2-32 550-sheet feeder PCA connectors

J100 Not used J301 Media width size switch
Media length size switch/

cassette presence switch

Table 2-32 550-sheet feeder PCA connectors (continued)
J101 Printer or paper feeder J302 Door switch
J102 550-sheet feeder, 2x550 sheet J303 Lifter motor rotation sensor
feeder, or HCI
Lifter motor
J201 Media out sensor J305 Lifting place position sensor
Media surface sensor
Feed sensor
Pickup clutch
J202 Feed motor N/A N/A
Figure 2-70 2x550-sheet feeder PCA connectors
J303 J604
J603
J302
J101
J301
J203
J100
J602
J601
J202 J201 J102
Table 2-33 2x550-sheet feeder PCA connectors

J100 Printer or paper feeder J302 Tray feed motor 2
J101 Not used J303 Lower tray lifter motor rotation

Table 2-33 2x550-sheet feeder PCA connectors (continued)
J102 Door switch J601 Upper tray media width size

switch
Upper tray media length size

switch
Upper tray presence switch
J201 Upper tray media out sensor J602 Upper tray lifter motor
Upper tray media surface sensor Upper tray lifting plate position
sensor
Upper tray feed sensor
Upper tray pickup clutch
J202 Tray feed motor 1 J603 Lower tray media width size
switch
Lower tray media length size

switch
Lower tray presence switch
J203 Upper tray lifter motor rotation J604 Lower tray lifter motor
Lower tray lifting plate position

sensor
J301 Lower tray pickup clutch N/A N/A
Lower tray media out sensor
Lower tray media surface

sensor
Lower tray feed sensor

Figure 2-71 HCI PCA connectors
J552 J303
J302
J101
J404
J301
J401
J203
J100
J202 J201 J102 J551
Table 2-34 HCI PCA connectors

J100 Printer or paper feeder J302 Right tray feed motor
J101 Not used J303 Feed sensor
J102 Door switch J401 Left tray lifter motor
J201 Left tray pickup clutch J404 Right tray lifter motor
Left tray media out sensor
Left tray media surface sensor
Left tray feed sensor
J202 Left tray feed motor J551 Left tray media size switch
Left tray media level switch
Left tray presence switch

Table 2-34 HCI PCA connectors (continued)
J203 Side feed guide open sensor J552 Right tray media size switch
Right tray media level switch
Right tray presence switch
J301 Right tray pickup clutch N/A N/A
Right tray media out sensor
Right tray media surface sensor
Right tray feed sensor
Inner finisher PCA connections (M776zs)
Connections and components on the inner finisher PCA is indicated in the following figure.
Figure 2-72 Inner finisher PCA connectors and components

J1009
J1099 J1098 J1007 J1005 J1002
J1001
J1003
J1200 J1008 J1299 J1006 J1004
Table 2-35 Inner finisher PCA connectors and components

J1001 Staple door switch J1008 Communication PCA (printer)
J1002 Bin1 output sensor J1009 Staple motor
SS feed motor
J1003 Staple shift motor J1098 Curl sensor
J1004 Bin1 home position sensor J1099 Trailing edge dropping solenoid
Front alignment motor
Rear alignment motor
Assist motor
J1005 Return roller motor J1200 Printer
Tray lifting motor
Paddle motor

Table 2-35 Inner finisher PCA connectors and components (continued)
J1006 Front jogger home position J1299 Not used

sensor
Rear jogger home position

sensor
Staple tray media presence

sensor
Assist guide home position

sensor
Media holder home position

sensor
Bin1 media surface sensor
J1007 Y alignment home position N/A N/A

sensor
Return roller home position

sensor
Bin1 lower limit sensor
Staple shift home position

sensor
Manual staple Media presence

sensor
Formatter connections
Connections and components on the formatter PCA is indicated in the following figure.

Figure 2-73 Formatter PCA connectors and components
J11
J35
J98
J12
J20 J97
J30
J17
J1
J21
J6
Table 2-36 Formatter connectors and components
J1 SODIMM J21 Internal USB ports accessory
J6 Printer power J30 Control panel
J11 Island of data (IOD) J35 Control panel
J12 HIP pocket USB connector J97 eMMC
J17 VIF J98 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
J20 Walk-up USB N/A N/A
External plug and port locations

Use the following figure to locate and identify the printer external port locations.

Figure 2-74 External plug and port locations
Item Description
1 Slot for a cable-type security lock
2 USB port for job storage feature (requires a 16 GB or larger USB flash drive)
3 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
4 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

Locations of major assemblies
Use the figures in this section to identify and locate major components and assemblies in the printer.
● Main assemblies
● Rollers
● Motors
● Fans
● Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs)
Main assemblies
Review the following information about the main assemblies in the printer and accessories.
Figure 2-75 Main assemblies (printer base; 1 of 3)

1 2 3
4 5 6 7
1 ITB assembly 5 Fuser shutter assembly

2 Fuser 6 Fuser drive assembly
3 Pickup assembly 7 Lifter drive assembly
4 Laser scanner assembly N/A N/A

1 2 3 4 5
6 7
1 Delivery assembly 5 Auto-close assembly
2 Formatter case assembly 6 Main drive assembly
3 Duplex drive assembly 7 Duplex switchback assembly
4 Registration density sensor assembly N/A N/A

1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8
1 Waste toner duct assembly 5 First cartridge rail assembly
2 Waste toner feed assembly 6 Second cartridge rail assembly
3 Tray 2 media size switch assembly 7 Third cartridge rail assembly
4 DT-cartridge rail assembly 8 Black cartridge rail assembly

Figure 2-78 Main assemblies (550-sheet feeder)
1
2
3
1 Media size switch assembly 3 Lifter drive assembly
2 Auto-close assembly 4 Pickup assembly

Figure 2-79 Main assemblies (2x550-sheet feeder)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
1 Lower tray media size switch 5 Upper tray lifter drive assembly
2 Lower tray auto-close assembly 6 Lower tray lifter drive assembly
3 Upper tray media size switch 7 Upper tray pickup assembly
4 Upper tray auto-close assembly 8 Lower tray pickup assembly

Figure 2-80 Main assemblies (HCI feeder)
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
1 Left tray pickup assembly 5 Left tray auto-close assembly
2 Feed assembly 6 Right tray lifter drive assembly
3 Right tray pickup assembly 7 Right tray auto-close assembly
4 Left tray lifter drive assembly N/A N/A
Rollers
Review the following information about the rollers in the printer and accessories.

Figure 2-81 Rollers (printer base)
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 Toner collection unit 4 Secondary transfer roller
2 Tray 2 pickup roller 5 Tray 1 pickup roller
3 Tray 2 separation roller 6 Tray 1 separation roller

Figure 2-82 Rollers (550-sheet feeder)
1
2
Item Description
1 Pickup roller
2 Separation roller

Figure 2-83 Rollers (2x550-sheet feeder)
1
1 Upper tray pickup roller 3 Lower tray pickup roller
2 Upper tray separation roller 4 Lower tray separation roller

Figure 2-84 Rollers (HCI feeder)
1 2 3 4
1 Left tray pickup roller 3 Right tray pickup roller
2 Left tray separation roller 4 Right tray separation roller
Motors
Review the following information about the motors in the printer.

Figure 2-85 Motors (printer base)
1 2 3 4 5
1 Drum motor 1 4 Developer alienation motor
2 Drum motor 2 5 Drum motor 3
3 Fuser motor N/A N/A
Fans
Review the following information about the fans in the printer.

Figure 2-86 Fans (printer base)
1 2 3 4 5
1 Cartridge front fan 4 Duplex fan
2 Fuser fan 5 Power supply fan
3 Cartridge rear fan N/A N/A
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs)
Review the following information about the PCAs in the printer and accessories.

Figure 2-87 PCAs (printer base)
1
2
3
6
5 7
4
8
9
1 Memory PCA 6 Fan connecting PCA
2 Low-voltage power supply 7 High-voltage power supply A

PCA
3 DC controller PCA 8 T2 connecting PCA
4 Environment sensor PCA 9 T2 high-voltage power supply

PCA
5 High-voltage power supply B PCA N/A N/A

Figure 2-88 PCA (550-sheet feeder)
1
Item Description
1 Paper feeder controller PCA
Figure 2-89 PCA (2x550-sheet feeder)

1
Item Description
1 Paper deck controller PCA

Figure 2-90 PCA (HCI feeder)
1 2 3 4
Item Description
1 HCI controller PCA
General timing chart

Review the following information about the general timing chart.

Print command
Operation STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY
1 TOP signal
2 Scanner motor (M7)
3 Developer alienation motor (M6)
4 Developer alienation sensor (SR4)
General circuit diagrams
242 Chapter 2 Solve problems

5 Feed motor (M5)
6 Drum motor 1 (M1)
7 Drum motor 2 (M2)
8 Drum motor 3 (M3)

Figure 2-91 General timing chart
9 Fuser motor (M4)
10 T1 roller alienation solenoid (SL1)
11 T1 roller home position sensor (SR42)
12 Primary charging bias (Y)
13 Primary charging bias (M)
14 Primary charging bias (C)
15 Primary charging bias (K)
16 Developing bias (Y)
17 Developing bias (M)
18 Developing bias (C)
19 Developing bias (K)
Review the following information about the general circuit diagrams.

20 T1 bias (Y)
21 T1 bias (M)
22 T1 bias (C)
23 T1 bias (K)
24 T2 bias
25 Fuser bias
26 ICLB bias
ENWW
Figure 2-92 General circuit diagram for the printer (1 of 7; M751/E75245/M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z/
M776zs)
Media sensor
Pickup ass’y Right door ass’y J16
1 2 3
M5 CL1 CL2 M4
SR12 SR5 SR6 SR9 SR8 SR25 SR14 SR15 SR16 SR26
M CL CL SL3 M
2 1
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Media sensor SL 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 J16L 1 2 3
J16DH
J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11 J14 J13 J15 J16D J390 J65
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
6
2 1
J12
J12DH
J12D
1 2
PAP_WIDTH_C_SNS
PAP_WIDTH_F_SNS
CST_FACE_SNS
/FEEDM_BRAKE
CST_PAP_SNS
FEEDM_FRSW
FEEDM_ENCB
FEEDM_ENCA
/FEEDM_PWM
REG_SNS
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+24VB
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J11L J14L J15L
6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J11DH J14DH J15DH
J11D J14D J15D MT2
J573 J571 J574 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J572
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Pickup relay PCA
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J139L J79L J131L MT3
J139DH J79DH J131DH
J139D J79D J131D
HEATER C
J23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2
2
PAP_WIDTH_R_SNS
PAP_WIDTH_C_SNS
PAP_WIDTH_F_SNS
Fuser
CST_FACE_SNS
/FEEDM_BRAKE
CST_PAP_SNS
MP_LAST_SNS
H1
H2
FEEDM_FRSW
FEEDM_ENCB
FEEDM_ENCA
/FEEDM_PWM
MP_PAP_SNS
/REFEED_CL
LOOP2_SNS
/FSRM_DEC
/FSRM_ACC
LOOP_SNS
USSCLK_G
USSCLK_G
+24VAFU3
+24VAFU3
+24VAFU3
REG_SNS
/FEED_CL
FSRM_FG
FSRM_FR
I2C_SDA
I2C_SCL
USSCLK
USSCLK
+3.3VB2
/MP_SL
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+24VB
+24VA
+24VB
+24VB
+5VC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
FSR-BAIS
J24
1 2
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J139 J191 J130 J131 J188 J152
HEATER M
HEATER SUB
FT3
5
DC controller PCA
<Input accessory>
J1513
+3.3VC
Fuser relay PCA
J77
3
1
3
SR7
GND
2
2
PAPOUT_SNS J1510
3
1
SW6 SW5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
M10 SR18
/FSRI2C_WE
I2C_SDA
I2C_SCL
+24VBRL
GND
FSRTH_R
FSRTH_SS
/FSR_EXIST_SNS
GND
PAPOUT_SNS
+3.3VC
FSRTH_F
FSRTH_M
+24VBFU3
M
M7 1 2 3
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
J90 J89 J17 OPC(C)TAG OPC(C)TAG OPC(C)TAG OPC(C)TAG

1 2
M 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 DDT(D)TAG 4st DDT(D)TAG 3st DDT(D)TAG 2st DDT(D)TAG 1st
J97 J95 J93 J91
4st 3st 2st 1st
SOLD2
SOLD1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
J47 J98 J96 J94 J92
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 4
J1L
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
J19DH
J19D
14 J37L J35L J33L J31L J1LA 1 2 3 4
A8 B6
4 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 J1LB
J47L J38L J36L J34L J32L
J47DH J7L J90L J17L J38DH J36DH J34DH J32DH
J7LH J90LH J17LH J37LH J35LH J33LH J31LH
J47D J7D J90D J38D J36D J34D J32D
J17D J37D J35D J33D J31D
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
J1DA
A8 B6
10
11
12
13
14
1 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J1DB
J1D
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
CST_SIZE20_SW
CST_SIZE21_SW
CST_SIZE10_SW
CST_SIZE11_SW
CST_SIZE12_SW
/FSR_EXT_SNS
OPT_SIO_CMD
CST_VOL_SNS
OPT_SIO_CLK
OPT_SIO_STS
OPT_CST_SW
PAPOUT_SNS
NAKAITA_SW
LIFTM_OUT2
LIFTM_OUT1
/FSRI2C_WE
FSRTH_SS
/SCN_DEC
/SCN_ACC
+24VAFU1
+24VBFU3
OPT_TMG
FSRTH_M
FSRTH_R
FSRTH_F
+24VBRL
CST_SW
I2C_SDA
I2C_SCL
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VB
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
VSS8
VSS7
VSS6
VSS5
VSS4
VSS3
VSS2
VSS1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VIN
VIN
VIN
VIN
VIN
VIN
VIN
VIN
5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J122 J133 J138 J159 J151
DC controller PCA
J158 J135 J106 J181 J182 J187 J112
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
+3.3VC
GND
TMS_R_OUTA
TMS_R_OUTB
TMS_SDA
TMS_SCL
TMS_F_OUTB
TMS_F_OUTA
+24VA
GND
FSR2_FANLK
FSR2_FAND
CRG_R_FANLK
CRG_FR_FAND
CRG_F_FANLK
FSR_FAND
FSR_FANLK
TCU_BOX_SW
TCU_SCW_SNS
+3.3VC
GND
TCU_SNS
ENV_TEMP
HUMOUT
/HUMOUT
GND
DUP_FANLK
DUP_FAND
+5VC
N.C
+5VD
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
GND
GND
GND
T2NPWM
T2NCLK
T2PPWM
T2PCLK
FSRCLK
FSRPWM
GND
T2IS
T2PVFB
GND
DEVM_PHA
DEVM_PHB
DEVM_IA
DEVM_IB
RDOOR_SW
GND
SW1
2 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FT6
FT5
J502 J508
FT4
2 1
FT1
T2 HVT PCA 9
J18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J135D J73D J106D
J551
Fan conecting PCA 2 1
DEVM_IB
DEVM_IA
DEVM_PHB
+3.3V
DEVM_PHA
GND
GND
+24VB
+24VB
J135DH
J554 J552 J135L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 J73DH J106DH SW4
J73L J106L MT1
3
+24VB
+24VA
1 2 3 1 2 3
+3.3VC
GND
TCU_SCW_SNS
GND
CRG_R_FANLK
CRG_FR_FAND
GND
CRG_F_FANLK
CRG_FR_FAND
ENV_TEMP
GND
HUMOUT
/HUMOUT
+3.3VC
GND
TCU_SNS
TCU_BOX_SW
GND
FSR_FAND
FSR_FANLK
GND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
DUP_FANLK
24VA
2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J503 J506 T2 connecting PCA 9
J450 J501B J501A
SOLD45
SOLD44
J507 J505 J509

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J28M
RD sensor PCA 1 2 3
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
DEVMOUT1A
DEVMOUT1B
DEVMOUT2B
DEVMOUT2A
1 2 3
3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 1 2
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J74D
J28F
J71 1 2 3
J75D J76D J74LH J77D
3 2 1 J75DH
J75L
J76DH
J76L
J74L J77DH
J77L
FM5 SW2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
SR27
GND
CRG_R_FANLK
CRG_FR_FAND
GND
CRG_F_FANLK
CRG_FR_FAND
FSR_FAND
FSR_FANLK
GND
RD sensor 1 RD sensor 2
3 2 1 2 1
J21 J80
3 2 1
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 3 2 1
2 1
J821 SR17
Environment
4 3 2 1
sensor PCA SW11
FM4 FM3 FM2 J46
M
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J507L J508L
M6 J507DH J508DH
SL1 J507D J508D
SL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
M2 M1 M3
SR3 SR2 SR4
2
M M M
2 1
J57 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
J42 J41 J57D 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J26 J53 J44 J27
J662
J663
J661
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3
J609 J606
DEVSEP_HP_SNS
DRM123_HP_SNS
Main drive ass’y
DRM4_HP_SNS
MAIN123_FR
MAIN123_FR
MAIN123_FR
/MAIN2_DEC
/MAIN2_ACC
/MAIN1_DEC
/MAIN1_ACC
/MAIN3_DEC
/MAIN3_ACC
MAIN2_FG
MAIN1_FG
MAIN3_FG
+24VAFU4
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
/T1_SL
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J564 J563 J565 J561
Main drive conecting PCA

J562
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J605 J604 J603 J601

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 1 2 3
RL_TEST
GND
AC_Hot
AC_Neutral
DEVSEP_HP_SNS
DRM123_HP_SNS
J82L
J82DH
J82D
PS_FANPWR
24V/5V_CHG_W
3 2 1
DRM4_HP_SNS
1 2 3
1 2 3
CAREN_SDA
MAIN123_FR
FM1
/MAIN3_DEC
/MAIN3_ACC
/MAIN2_DEC
/MAIN2_ACC
/MAIN1_DEC
/MAIN1_ACC
CAREN_SCL
PS_FANLK
FSR_TRD2
FSR_TRD1
PS_FANLK
FSR_RLD2
FSR_RLD1
MAIN3_FG
MAIN2_FG
MAIN1_FG
+24VAFU4
PS_FAND
24VA_ON
+24VBRL
5VB_ON
GND
ZEROX
+3.3VC
+3.3VC
+3.3VA
/T1_SL
+5VA
+5VA
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
J154 J103 J102
DC controller PCA
SOLD111
SOLD110
IL101
C
D
A

ENWW 244 Chapter 2 Solve problems
6
1 /VD021 1 1 +5VDFU 1
2 VD021 2 2 /ILL_PWM1 2
3 CTRL22 3 3 GND 3
6 FSRTH_SS_GND
4 CTRL20 4 4 /ILL_PWM2 4
5 FSRTH_SS FSRTH_SS TH1
2 1 5 CTRL21 5 5 GND 5
6 /VD022 6 6 /BD2 6
4 FSRTH_M_GND TH3
2 1 7 VD022 7 7 GND 7
6
3 +24VBRL
J1517
8 GND 8 8 /LDPWM1 8
2 FSRTH_R_GND TH2
2 1 9 /LDPWM2 9 9 GND 9
1 FSRTH_R FSRTH_R
SOLD4
SOLD6
10 GND 10 10 VD011 10
11 /VDF12 11 11 /VD011 11
4 +24VBFU3 TP1
2 TP 1 12 VDF12 12 12 CTRL10 12
Fuser
3 FSRTH_M FSRTH_M
13 CTRL12 13 13 CTRL11 13
4
2 FSRTH_F_GND
J1516
14 CTRL11 14 14 CTRL12 14
Laser PCA (Y/M)
1 FSRTH_F FSRTH_F TH4

2 1 15 CTRL10 15 15 VD012 15
5
Fuser relay PCA

SOLD3
SOLD5
16 /VDF11 16 16 /VD012 16
17 VDF11 17 17 GND 17
18 GND 18 18 +3.3VD 18
J121
19 /LDPWM1 19 19 +3.3VD 19
29
29
J2011
20 GND 20 20 /LDPWM2 20
21 /BD21 21 21 GND 21
22 GND 22 22 VDO22 22
23 /ILL_PWM2 23 23 /VDO22 23
29
29
J2023
24 GND 24 24 CTRL21 24
25 /ILL_PWM1 25 25 CTRL20 25
J2001
26 GND 26 26 CTRL22 26
27 +5VDFU 27 27 VDO21 27
28 +5VDFU 28 28 /VDO21 28
29 +5VDFU 29 29 GND 29
1 GND 1 27 GND 1
2 /LDPWM3 2 26 /LDPWM3 2
3 GND 3 25 GND 3
4 VD032 4 24 VDO32 4
5 /VD032 5 23 /VDO32 5
6 CTRL31 6 22 CTRL31 6
7 CTRL30 7 21 CTRL30 7
8 CTRL32 8 20 CTRL32 8
9 VD031 9 19 VDO31 9
10 /VD031 10 18 /VDO31 10
11 GND 11 17 GND 11
Laser connetcting PCA
12 /LDPWM4 12 16 +3.3VD 12
13 GND 13 15 +3.3VD 13
14 VD041 14 14 /LDPWM4 14
Laser PCA (C/K)
4
J123
15 /VD041 15 13 GND 15
30
30
J2022
16 CTRL40 16 12 VDO41 16
17 CTRL41 17 11 /VDO41 17
18 CTRL42 18 10 CTRL40 18
27
J2024
19 VD042 19 9 CTRL41 19
20 /VD042 20 8 CTRL42 20
2 1
21 GND 21 7 VDO42 21
22 /ILL_PWM3 22 TH 5 6 /VDO42 22
23 GND 23 5 +5VDFU 23
27
24 /ILL_PWM4 24 4 /ILL_PWM3 24
25 GND 25 3 GND 25
J2002
26 SCN_TH 26 2 /ILL_PWM4 26
27 GND 27 1 GND 27
28 I2C_SDA 28
29 +3.3VC 29
30 I2C_SCL 30
DC controller PCA
17 HVTCLK 1
16 HVTLD 2
15 HVTDATA 3
14 HVTOE 4
13 ICLRIS 5
12 ICLBIS 6
3
11 ICLRN 7
10 ICLBN 8
9 ICLCLK 9
HVT A PCA
J156
8 T1IS1 10
17
7 T1IS2 11
6 T1IS3 12
17
5 T1IS4 13
4 GND 14
J250
3 GND 15
2 +24VB 16
1 +24VB 17
27 +24VB 1
26 +24VB 2
25 GND 3 25 TONIN4 1
24 GND 4 24 GND 2
23 TON4 5 23 TON4 3
22 TON3 6 22 TON3 4
21 TON2 7 21 GND 5
20 TON1 8 20 TONIN3 6
19 TONPWM 9 19 TONIN2 7
HVT B PCA
18 TONCLK 10 18 RGV1 8
17 BLPWM1 11 17 TON2 9
16 DEVPWM1 12 16 TON1 10
15 RSPWM1 13 15 GND 11
HVT B sub PCA
J113
14 PRIPWM1 14 14 TONIN1 12
27
27
2
13 BLPWM2 15 13 BLFB1 13
12 DEVPWM2 16 12 +24VB 14
J301
11 RSPWM2 17 11 BLOUT1 15
10 PRIPWM2 18 10 BLPWM1 16
9 DEVPWM1 17
25
25
9 BLPWM3 19
8 DEVPWM3 20 8 DEVOUT1 18
7 RSPWM3 21 7 DEVFB1 19
J302
J303
6 PRIPWM3 22 6 RSFB1 20
5 BLPWM4 23 5 RSOUT1 21
4 DEVPWM4 24 4 RSPWM1 22
3 RSPWM4 25 3 PRIPWM1 23
High-voltage power supply B ass’y
2 PRIPWM4 26 2 PRIOUT1 24
1 HVTBCLK 27 1 PRIFB1 25
1
A
B
C
D
Tools for troubleshooting 245 ENWW
6
+5VB
J612
2
+5VB
J613
3
GND
J618
4
GND
J619
5
GND
J620 WAKE_VC 1
36
6
+5VB
J614 WAKE_ENG 2
35
7
+5VB
J615 VC_RST 3
34
8
+5VB
J616 +3.3VAFU 4
33
9
GND
J621 CLEI 5
5
32
GND
10
J626 ENGTYPE 6
31
+24VA
11
J624 CLEO 7
30
+24VA
12
1
J625 GND 8
1
J72
29
GND
13
J627 /BD20 9
2
SW3
28
+5VB
14
J617 GND 10
2
27
1
/VDO11 11
J72L
J72D
4
J72LH
26
2
VDO11 12
3
1
1
25
3
J811
PCA
GND 13
2
2
24
4
14
SW7
/VDO21 GND
17
1
3
23
2
J153A
VDO21 15 FDOOR_SW
16
Power switch
22
GND 16 +5VA
15
21
/TOP 17 /SW_LED
14
3.3V
20
GND 18 POWER_SW
J1822
13
J201A
SCL
36
36
19
1
12
/VD031 19 24VA
12
3
Formatter
GND
J114
18
2
11
J153LA
2
J153DA
VD031 20 PRE_EXP1_F
1st
11
2
J153LHA
SDA
17
3
10
GND 21 PRE_EXP1_R
10
1 IOD_nPD
16
9
1
9
4
/VD041 22 24VA
J115
Memory PCA
15
8
2
8
5
VD041 23 PRE_EXP2_F
2st
14
7
3
7
6
GND 24 PRE_EXP2_R
13
6
1
6
7
4
/VD012 25 24VA
J116
12
5
2
5
8
VD012 26 PRE_EXP3_F
3st
11
4
3
4
9
GND 27 PRE_EXP3_R
10
3
1
/VD022 28 24VA
10
J117
9
2
Pre-exposure LED
VD022 29 PRE_EXP4_F
4st
11
8
1
3
GND 30 PRE_EXP4_R
12
USB cable 7
/VD032 31
6
VD032 32
5
GND 33
4
1
8
1
/VD042 34
8
8
1
1
SHUT_SNS
J105
3
2
7
2
VD042 35
J184L2
J183A
J183LA
7
7
J184D2
2
2
J183DA
GND
J183LHA
J184DH2
SR43
2
3
6
3
ENGTYPE 36
6
6
3
3
+3.3VC
1
USB cable
5
5
5
4
4
GND
4
4
1
4
4
5
5
SHUTMOUT2A
J49L2
3
J49D2
3
2
J49DH2
3
3
6
6
1 2 3 4 SHUTMOUT2B
M
2
M25
2
3
2
2
7
7
SHUTMOUT1B
1
+5V
1
4
GND
+3.3V
1
1
8
8
SHUTMOUT1A
CP_WAKE/nPD
3
3
1
DC controller PCA
3
1
FULL_FD2_SNS
J110
SB-L cable
2
2
2
HDMI cable
J189A
J189LA
2
2
J189DA
GND
J189LHA
SR41
1
3
1
3
+3.3VC
1 2 3 4
3
1
6
1
FSRPRS_SNS
J101
J52LA
2
2
J52DA
5
2
GND
J52DHA
J185A2
SR44
1
3
4
3
+3.3VC
3
T1HP_ITBNEW_SNS
2
GND
1
1
J107
+3.3VC
J66LA
2
J66DA
2
2
J66DHA
SR42
Contol panel
3
7
2
1
2
/DUP_SL
J68
J157A
6
1
2
SL
J68DA
24VAFU4
SL8
J68DHA
5
4
DUPMOUT2A
3
4
1
1
DUPMOUT2B
J120
J69LA
2
3
2
J69DA
2
DUPMOUT1B
J69DHA
M
1
2
3
3
DUPMOUT1A
M24
4
4
1
A
B
C
D
Figure 2-93 General circuit diagram for the printer (3 of 7; M751/E75245)
M14 CL6 SW15 SW17
SR23 SR22 SR24
M CL
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
J32 J6 J4 J41 J24 J81
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J80
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J45L J47L J12L
J45LH J47LH J12LH
J45D J47D J12D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2B
OUT2A
PICK-CL
+24VF
PLVL
SGND
+3.3VOPF
PSNS
SGND
+3.3VOPF
PATH
SGND
+3.3VOPF
WIDTH01
SGND
WIDTH02
WIDTH03
LENGTH01
SGND
LENGTH02
TRAY-OPEN
4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J202_F J201_F J301_F
M15
SR21
SW18 M
4
2 1
1 2 3 1 2
J42 J9
1 2 1 2 3
SOLD6
SOLD5
SGND
LIFT PLATE
PAPER-COUNT
SGND
+3.3VOPF
LM-ON
+24VF
2 1 5 4 3 2 1
3
J305_F J303_F
Paper feeder controller PCA
SW16
1 2
J38 J25
J38DH J25DH J21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2
2
CLK
CMD
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
STS
ACC
CSTOPEN
+3.3VB
+3.3VB
CSTOPEN
ACC
STS
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
CMD
CLK
SGND
R-DOOR-OPEN
5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
J100_F J102_F J101_F J302_F
1
A
B
C
D
Figure 2-94 General circuit diagram for the 550-sheet feeder
ENWW
6 5 4 3 2 1
SR52 M29
M <Nagano mSKU>
1 2 3
J508
Pre-exposure LED 1 2 3
SL10
4 3 2 1
J49BL
SL
SW26
1st 3st J49BDH 2 1
Power switch
SR50 SR49 SW19 J49BD 1 2
PCA
1 2 3 4 D
1 2 SW18
J186 J192 J20
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2
J52B J66B 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
J72B J811B
1 2 3 1 2 3 J184L5 J10L
1 2 1 2 3 J184DH4 J10DH
2st 4st
J184D4 J10D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
J190 J193
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 1 2 3
J52BL J66BL
J52BDH J66BDH
J52BD J66BD
1 2 3 1 2 3
5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J72BL J153BL J183BL J130L

J72BLH J153BLH J183BLH J130LH
J720BD J153BD J183BD J130D
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
GND
+3.3VC
GND
+3.3VC
GND
+5VA
24VA
24VA
24VA
24VA
GND
+3.3VC
GND
6 5 4 3 2 1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J185B J153B J183B J2201

C
DC controller PCA
J201B
36
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
+3.3VAFU
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
B
GND
GND
4 3 2 1 +5V
4
4
36
+3.3V
3
3
GND
2
2
1
1
SB-H cable
Formatter Control panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5
HDMI cable
USB cable
USB cable
+5VB
+5VB
GND
GND
GND
+5VB
+5VB
+5VB
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VA
GND
+5VB
3.3V
GND
A
5 4 3 2 1
J1822B
J612B
J613B
J618B
J619B
J620B
J614B
J615B
J616B
J621B
J626B
J624B
J625B
J627B
J617B
Memory PCA
Figure 2-95 General circuit diagram for the printer (4 of 7; M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
Tools for troubleshooting 247

6 5 4 3 2 1
Fuser output sensor 3 PCA

J211A
Color sensor relay PCA
J212A J213A J210A
12 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D
5V
SR20
GND
GND
+5VC
+5VCI
J1AA
1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
FM6 1 2 3
+3.3VCF(HP_SNS)
SL5 J88A
1 2 3
SOLD28
SOLD29
3 2 1
+3.3VR
GNDB
GNDB
+5VC_IR
1 2
SL
J59A 3 2 1

9
8
7
6
M12 M19 CL3 M11
12
11
10
3 2 1
SR22 M SR21 SR19
N.C.
GND
M M CL M
M14 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
SR24
1 2 3
J210AL J165AL 1 2 3 1 2 3
J167AL J99AL J88AL
J210ADH J165ADH J167ADH J99ADH J88ADH
J170A J210AD J165AD J168A J169A J171A J166A J38A J28A J167AD J99AD J88AD
1 2 3 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3
J1A
3
N.C.
3
1
GND
2
2
Color sensor
1
3
N.C.
N.C.
J100AL
J100ADH
J100AD
J1400A
3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J380AL J1654AL J1651AL J166AL J1648AL C
J380ADH Fuser output sensor 2 PCA J1654ADH J1651ADH J166ADH J1648ADH
J380AD J1654AD J1651AD J166AD J1648AD
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
N.C.
GND
+3.3VC
GND
GND
+5VCI
GND
GND
GND
+3.3VC
+24VA
GND
+3.3VC
GND
+24VA
GND
+3.3VC
3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1655A J1654A J1660A J1651A J1661A J1656A J1648A
Duplex PCA
J1657A J1643A J1641A J1652A J1649A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VE
+5VC
+5VC
+24VA
+24VA
+3.3VC
B
2 1 3 2 1
J86A J174AD
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J174ADH
J184A J164A J174AL
J628
J629
J630
J631
1 2 1 2 3
DC controller PCA SW8

Low-voltage 1 2 3
power supply
FM7
A
Figure 2-96 General circuit diagram for the printer (5 of 7; M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)
ENWW
ENWW
6 5 4 3 2 1
SR58 M31
M
1 2 3
J278
Pre-exposure LED 1 2 3
4 3 2 1
J49L7
Power switch 1st 3st J49DH7
SR57 SR56 SW24 J49D7
PCA
1 2 3 4 D
1 2 SW23
J279 J281
1 2 3 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3
J276 J277 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J72C J811C
1 2 3 1 2 3 J184L6
1 2 1 2 3 J184DH6
2st 4st
J184D6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J280 J282
3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 1 2 3
J520L2 J660L2
J520DH2 J660DH2
J520D2 J660D2
1 2 3 1 2 3
5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J72CL J153CL J183CL

J72CLH J153CLH J183CLH
J720CD J153CD J183CD
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GND
+3.3VC
GND
+3.3VC
GND
+5VA
24VA
24VA
24VA
24VA
GND
+3.3VC
GND
6 5 4 3 2 1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J185C J153C J183C
C
DC controller PCA
J201C
36
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
+3.3VAFU
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
B
36
Formatter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5
Figure 2-97 General circuit diagram for the printer (6 of 7; M776zs)
+5VB
+5VB
GND
GND
GND
+5VB
+5VB
+5VB
GND
GND
+24VA
+24VA
GND
+5VB
3.3V
GND
A
5 4 3 2 1
J1822C
J612C
J613C
J618C
J619C
J620C
J614C
J615C
J616C
J621C
J626C
J624C
J625C
J627C
J617C
Memory PCA

6 5 4 3 2 1
Fuser output sensor 3 PCA

J211B
Color sensor relay PCA
J212B J213B J210B
12 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D
5V
SR32 SR29 SR28
GND
GND
+5VC
+5VCI
J1BB
1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 2 3 1 2 3 FM13 1 2 3
J163 J170B SL4 J88B

1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
SOLD14
SOLD15
3 2 1
+3.3VR
GNDB
GNDB
+5VC_IR
1 2
SL
J59B 3 2 1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M13 M18 CL4 M15
12
11
10
3 2 1
M SR30 SR31
N.C.
GND
M M CL M
3 2 1 3 2 1
M34 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
SR59
J163L J170BL J210BL J165BL 1 2 3 1 2 3
J167BL J99BL J88BL
J163DH J170BDH J210BDH J165BDH J167BDH J99BDH J88BDH
J163D J170BD J210BD J165BD J168B J169B J171B J166B J38B J28B J167BD J99BD J88BD
1 2 3 1 2 3 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3
J1B
3
N.C.
3
1
GND
2
2
Color sensor
1
3
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
J100BL
J100BDH
J100BD
J1400B
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1650BL J1654BL J1651BL J166BL J1648BL C
J1650BDH Fuser output sensor 2 PCA J1654BDH J1651BDH J166BDH J1648BDH
J1650BD J1654BD J1651BD J166BD J1648BD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND
+3.3VC
GND
+3.3VC
GND
GND
+5VCI
GND
GND
GND
+3.3VC
+24VA
GND
+3.3VC
GND
+24VA
GND
+3.3VC
3 2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1655B J1654B J1660B J1651B J1661B J1656B J1648B
Duplex PCA
J1657B J1643B J1642 J1645A J1658 J1641B J1646 J1652B J1649B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5VE
+5VE
+5VC
+5VC
+5VC
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+3.3VC
B
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J501BP
Communication PCA
J504BP
GND
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
J29 J86B J174BD
3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
/MD1
+5VE
+5VC
J174BDH
J189B J184B J164B
/RESET1
Figure 2-98 General circuit diagram for the printer (7 of 7; M776zs)
J174BL
/DETECT2
J628C
J629C
J630C
J631C
1 2 1 2 3
/ENTRY_SNS
STAPLE_SNS
/PRINTER_TXD
/PRINTER_RXD
1 2
DC controller PCA SW25
SW10 Low-voltage 1 2 3
power supply
1 2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FM10
J25M
J3504D
J3504DH
A
<Output accessory> <Output accessory>
ENWW
ENWW
6 5 4 3 2 1
M8
J2411 J2412
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 D
M1
SL1 PS18
+5V
SL M
GND
1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
J3101
MSW1
NC
COM
SOLD3 3 SOLD4
1
2
NO
PS1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
J2401
3 2 1
J3201
J3303L
1 2 Staple relay PCA
J3303DH 2 1
J3303D
J2403
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
<Printer> <Printer>
1 2 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J3306F J3308 C
+24V
GND
N.C.
+5VE
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+24V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
GND
+24V
+24R
J1200 1 2 3 4 J1008 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2 1
J1099 J1098 J1002 J1009 J1001
(J1200 XA) (J1008 CSR)
SSMBM controller PCA
(J1299 CZ)
J1003 J1005 J1007 J1004 J1006
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
J3005D J3007D
J3005DH 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J3007DH 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 2-99 General circuit diagram for the inner finisher
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
J3005L J3007L
J3009D J3010D J3008D

3 2 1 J3009DH 3 2 1 3 2 1 J3008DH
1 2 3 1 2 3 J3010LH 1 2 3
J3009L J3010L J3008L
J3907D
J3907DH 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J3907L
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J3204
J3205
J3207
J3208
J3206
J3209
S P
PS4 PS5 PS7 PS8 PS6 PS9

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1
J3202
J3203
J3210
J3211
4 3 2 1 1 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
J3214
J3103
J3104
J3105
4 3 2 1 1 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J3107
J3106
J3102
J3110
PS2 PS3 PS10 PS11 M M M
PS14
A
J2501
M M M M
4 3 2 1 3 2 1
M3 M4 M5
M7 M6 M2 M10 LED2501 3 2 1
J3212
LED PCA
PS12

6
CL4 SW7 SW8 M13 M12

SR14 SR13 SR15 SR20 SW9
CL SW13 M M
1 2 1 2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
J10 J12 J11 J33 J3 J15 J60 J2 J13 J28
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2
SOLD4
SOLD3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J30LH J8LH J31LH J90LH J92LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
5
T3 PICK-CL
+24VF1
T3 PLVL
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T3 PSNS
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T3 PATH
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T3 WIDTH01
SGND
T3 WIDTH02
T3 WIDTH03
SGND
T3 LENGTH01
T3 LENGTH02
SGND
T3-TRAY-OPEN
T3-BOARD
T3-LM-I1
+24VF4
SGND
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2B
OUT2A
SGND
+3.3VOPF
R-DOOR-OPEN
T3 PAPER-COUNT
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1
J201_D J601_D J602 J203_D J202_D J102_D
SW10 SW11 M6 M7
CL5
SR17 SR16 SR18 SR19
CL SW14 M M
1 2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
4
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
J18 J17 J8 J20 J16 J26 J61 J1 J23
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
SOLD2
SOLD1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J36LH J22LH J41LH J91LH J93LH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
SGND
SGND
T4 PICK-CL
+24VF2
T4 PLVL
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T4 PSNS
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T4 PATH
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T4 WIDTH01
T4 WIDTH02
T4 WIDTH03
T4 LENGTH01
T4 LENGTH02
T4 TRAY OPEN
SGND
T4-BOARD
T4-LM
+24VF4
SGND
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2B
OUT2A
+3.3VOPF
T4 PAPER-COUNT
3
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J301_D J603_D J604 J303_D J302_D
Paper deck controller PCA
J39DH
J39
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
+3.3VB2
H-ACC
OPT_STS
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
CSTOPEN
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
OPT_CMD
OPT_CLK
5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J101_D J100_D
1
A
B
C
D
Figure 2-100 General circuit diagram for the 2x550-sheet feeder
Tools for troubleshooting 253 ENWW
6
CL2 SW2 M4 M1
SR5 SR4 SR6
CL M M SW3
1 2
1
2
3
4
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
J36 J35 J34 J37 J27 J29 J44 J46
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J42L J43L J24L
J42LH J43LH J24LH
J42D J43D J24D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
5
T4 PICK-CL
+24VF2
T4 PLVL
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T4 PSNS
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T4 PATH
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T4-WIDTH
SGND
T4-TRAY-OPEN
T4-PAPER-CD
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2B
OUT2A
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2B
OUT2A
SGND
R-DOOR-OPEN
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 1
J301 J552 J404 J302 J102
CL1 SW1 M2 M3
SR1 SR2 SR3
CL M M
4
1
2
3
4
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
J22 J19 J14 J30 J7 J5 J72
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J25L J39L J2L
J25LH J39LH J2LH
J25D J39D J2D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
OUT1A
OUT2A
OUT1A
T3 PICK-CL
OUT1B
OUT2B
OUT2A
+24VF1
T3 PLVL
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T3 PSNS
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T3 PATH
SGND
+3.3VOPF
T3-WIDTH
SGND
T3-TRAY-OPEN
T3-PAPER-CD
OUT1B
OUT2B
3
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
J201 J551 J401 J202
HCI controller PCA
SR8 SR7
3 2 1 3 2 1
J50 J51
1 2 3 1 2 3
J40DH
J40
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
6 5 4 3 2 1
J38L
J38LH
J38D
1 2 3 4 5 6
PATH-EXIT
SGND
+3.3VOPF
GUIDE-OPEN
SGND
+3.3VOPF
+3.3VB2
CSTOPEN
H-ACC
OPT_STS
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
OPT_CMD
OPT_CLK
5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J101_H J303 J203 J100
1
A
B
C
D
Figure 2-101 General circuit diagram for the HCI feeder
Internal test and information pages
Review the following information about the internal test and information pages.
● Print a configuration page

Print a configuration page
Use the following procedure to print a configuration page.
● Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Print the configuration page from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● HP embedded Jetdirect page
● Finding important information on the configuration pages
NOTE: Depending on the model, up to three pages print when printing a configuration page. In addition to the
main configuration page, the HP embedded Jetdirect configuration page prints.
Print the configuration page from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to print the configuration page from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the following menu:
● Configuration/Status Pages
3. Touch Configuration Page to select it.
Print the configuration page from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to print the configuration page from an LCD control panel.
press the OK button.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.

Figure 2-102 Configuration page
1 5
6
7
8
2
3
4
1 Device Information, including the firmware version, 6 Memory

usage statistics, and the service ID.
2 Installed Personalities and Options information, 7 Event Log information that shows the most recent entries
including installed printer languages and hard disk in the log.
information.
3 HP Web Services status information 8 Security information that includes encryption information
and current security settings.
4 Color Density information 9 Paper Trays and Options information that shows installed
trays and current paper size/type settings.
5 Calibration Information that shows when the printer N/A N/A

most recently performed a calibration.
HP embedded Jetdirect page
The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information:

Always make sure the status line under the general information line indicates "HP embedded Jetdirect page."
Figure 2-103 HP embedded Jetdirect page
1 4
Item Description
1 General Information indicates the printer status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto
negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date.
2 Security Settings information
3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received,
total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.
4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address
5 IPv4 information
6 IPv6 information
Finding important information on the configuration pages
Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the email gateways, is especially
helpful while servicing the printer. This information is on the various configuration pages.

Firmware date codes: When performing a remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of the following firmware
components are upgraded.
Table 2-37 Firmware date codes

Specific information Configuration page
DC controller Look on the main configuration page, under "Device Information."
Firmware datecode Look on the main configuration page, under "Product Information"
or "Device Information".
HP embedded Jetdirect firmware version Look on the HP embedded Jetdirect page, under "General
Information."
Accessories and internal storage: All optional devices that are installed on the printer should be listed on the
main configuration page. In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax
accessory. These pages list more-detailed information for those devices.
Table 2-38 Accessories and internal storage

Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page, under "Installed Personalities
and Options." Shows model and ID.
Total RAM Look on the main configuration page, under "Memory."
Additional 550-sheet feeders Look on the main configuration page, under "Paper Trays and
Options"
Engine cycles and event logs: Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing printer
maintenance. The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors. To see a list of the 50 most recent
errors, print an event log from the Troubleshooting menu.
Table 2-39 Engine cycles and event logs

Engine cycles Look on the main configuration page, under "Impressions" or

"Device Information".
Event-log information Look on the main configuration page, under "Event Log."
Error-log information Look on the main configuration page, under "Event Log."

Control panel menus
You can perform basic printer setup by using the control panel menus. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for
more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address bar of a web browser.
● Reports menu
● Settings menu
● Supplies menu
● Trays menu
● Support Tools menu
● Job Storage menu
● USB Drive menu
● Job Log menu
● Access menu
Reports menu
Review the following information about the Reports menu.
To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Reports, and
then select OK.
NOTE: Use the up arrow button or down arrow button to highlight the report, and then press the OK
button to select it. Use the down arrow to scroll down to Cancel, and then use the right arrow to highlight the
print icon . Select OK to print the pages.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-40 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description
Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Select OK to select the report. Shows a map of the entire control
panel system and the selected
values for each setting.
Configuration/Status Pages Current Settings Page Select OK to select the report. Shows a summary of the current
settings for the printer. This might
be helpful if you plan to make
changes and need a record of the
present configuration.
Configuration/Status Pages Configuration Page Select OK to select the report. Shows the printer settings and
installed accessories.
Configuration/Status Pages How to Connect Page Select OK to select the report. Shows the network information
typically needed to connect the
printer to a network.

Table 2-40 Reports menu (continued)
Configuration/Status Pages Supplies Status Page Select OK to select the report. Shows the approximate remaining
life for the supplies; reports
statistics on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial number,
page counts, and maintenance
information.
HP provides approximations of the

remaining life for the supplies as a
customer convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels might be
different from the approximations
provided.
Configuration/Status Pages Usage Page Select OK to select the report. Shows a count of all paper sizes
that have passed through the
printer; lists whether they were
simplex, duplex, monochrome, or
color; and reports the page count.
Configuration/Status Pages File Directory Page Select OK to select the report. Shows the file name and folder
name for files that are stored in the
printer memory.
Configuration/Status Pages Web Services Status Page Select OK to select the report. Shows the detected Web Services
for the printer.
Configuration/Status Pages Color Usage Job Log Select OK to select the report. Shows color jobs completed by the
printer.
Other Pages Demonstration Page Select OK to select the report. Prints a demonstration page.
Other Pages RGB samples Select OK to select the report. Prints color samples for different
RGB values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.
Other Pages CMYK samples Select OK to select the report. Prints color samples for different
CMYK values. Use the samples as a
guide for matching printed colors.
Other Pages PCL Font List Select OK to select the report. Prints the available PCL fonts.
Other Pages PS Font List Select OK to select the report. Prints the available PS fonts.

Settings menu
The menus under the Settings menu contain the options for changing the printer settings. Learn about these
menus and settings.
● General menu
● Print menu
● Manage Supplies menu
● Networking menu
General menu
Review the following information about the General menu in the Settings menu.
To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Settings, and
then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.
Table 2-41 General menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date and
time and to configure
YYYY/MMM/DD date/time settings.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format that
the printer uses to
24 hours show the date and
time, for example 12-
hour format or 24-hour
format.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Date Select the date from a

pop-up calendar.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Time Select the time from a

pop-up keypad.
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Time Zone Select the time zone.
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule A list of scheduled Select an event from For the selected event, Use to configure the
events displays. the list to edit it change the time and days printer to automatically
settings as desired. wake up or go to sleep
at specific times on
Done specific days. Using this
feature saves energy.
Select the trash can icon
to delete the event NOTE: You must
configure the date and
time settings before
you can use this
feature.
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule New event Event Type Wake Select whether to add
or edit a Wake event or
Sleep a Sleep event, and then
select the time and the
days for the wake or
sleep event.

Table 2-41 General menu (continued)
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule New event Time Set the wake or sleep
event time parameters.
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule New event Event Days Select days of the week Set the wake or sleep
from a list. event day parameters.
Energy Settings Sleep Settings Sleep After Inactivity Range: 1 to 110 minutes Set the number of
minutes after which
Auto Off After Sleep Default = 0 minutes the printer enters
Sleep or Auto Off
Select one of these mode. Use the arrow
items: buttons on the control
panel to increase or
● HP Auto Off/Auto decrease the number
On (Wake on of minutes.
most events)
● Shut down
(Wake on power
button only)
Display Settings Display Brightness A sliding bar displays Use to specify the
with the indicator set intensity of the LCD
in the middle. Use the control panel display.
arrow keys to select
the desired brightness
and then select Done.
Display Settings Language Settings Language Select from a list of Use to select a
languages that the printer different language for
supports. control panel
messages and specify
the default keyboard
layout. When you
select a new language,
the keyboard layout
automatically changes
to match the factory
default for the selected
language.
Display Settings Language Settings Keyboard Layout Each language has a Select the default
default keyboard layout. keyboard layout that
To change it, select from a matches the language
list of layouts. you want to use.
Display Settings Information Screen Show connection Use this menu item to
information* display or hide
connection information
Hide connection on the Home screen.
information

Display Settings Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 seconds Specifies the amount
of time that elapses
Default = 60 seconds between any activity
on the control panel
and when the printer
resets to the default
settings. When the
timeout expires, the
control panel display
returns to the Home
menu, and any user
signed in to the printer
is signed out.
Display Settings Clearable Warnings Display during job* Use this feature to set
the period that a
Display until cleared clearable warning
displays on the control
panel. If the On setting
is selected, clearable
warnings appear until
the Clearable Warnings
button is pressed. If the
Job setting is selected,
clearable warnings stay
on the display during
the job that generated
the warning and
disappear from the
display when the next
job starts.
Display Settings Continuable Events Auto-continue (10 Use this option to

seconds)* configure the printer
behavior when the
Touch OK to continue printer encounters
certain errors. If the
Auto-continue (10
seconds) option is
selected, the job will
continue after 10
seconds. If the Touch
OK to continue option
is selected, the job will
stop and require the
user to touch the OK
button before
continuing.
Enable Device USB Enabled Enables the printer to

open a file from a USB
Disabled* drive

Jam Recovery Auto* This printer provides a

jam recovery feature
Off that reprints jammed
pages. Select one of
On the following options:
Auto: The printer

attempts to reprint
jammed pages when
sufficient memory is
available. This is the
default setting.
Off: The printer does

not attempt to reprint
jammed pages.
Because no memory is
used to store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.
NOTE: When using

this option, if the
printer runs out of
paper and the job is
being printed on both
sides, some pages can
be lost.
On: The printer always

reprints jammed
pages. Additional
memory is allocated to
store the last few
pages printed. This
might cause overall
performance to suffer.
Auto Recovery Enabled The printer attempts to

reprint jammed pages
Disabled* when sufficient
memory is available.

Enable AutoSend Disable* Browse to the HP

Embedded Web Server
Enable AutoSend configuration
page for advanced set
up and the HP online
Privacy Statement
Information.
Use the Enable

AutoSend menu to
enable or disable the
AutoSend feature. The
AutoSend feature
enables your product
to periodically send
product configuration
information including
serial number, event
logs, page usage
counts and supplies
status information to
HP web addresses
(URLs), or email
addresses. Information
sent to HP is used to
improve products and
services, and to
monitor the product if
you have a relationship
with HP that provides
you services such as
proactive cartridge
replacement, pay-per-
page contracts,
support agreements,
or usage tracking.
Hold Off Print Job On* Enable this feature if

you want to prevent
Off print jobs from starting
while a user is initiating
a copy job from the
control panel. Held
print jobs start printing
after the copy job is
finished, provided that
no other copy job is in
the print queue.
Reset Factory Settings Cancel Touch Reset to reset

current user-specified
Reset default settings to the
factory default
settings.
Print menu
Review the following information about the Print menu in the Settings menu.

then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Print, and then press the OK button.
Table 2-42 Print menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth Level Values Description
Enable Print from USB Enabled Enables the printer to

Drive open a file from a USB
Disabled* drive.
Managed Stored Jobs Job Sort Order Job Name* This option allows you
list the jobs either
Date* alphabetically or
chronologically.
Managed Stored Jobs Retain Temporary Do not retain Sets which temporary
Jobs jobs will be retained in
Personal jobs only the event of a printer
reboot.
All temporary jobs
Managed Stored Jobs Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs that
Default = 32 are stored in the
printer memory.
The Temporary Job

Storage Limit feature
specifies the number of
temporary jobs that
can be stored on the
printer. The maximum
allowed value is 300.
Managed Stored Jobs Standard Stored Job Off Configure global

Retention settings for jobs that
30 minutes are stored in the
printer memory.
1 hour
The Standard Stored
4 hours Job Retention feature
specifies the amount of
1 day time jobs can be stored
on the printer.
1 week
4 weeks
Default Print Options Number of Copies Range: 1-32000 Sets the default
number of copies for a
Default = 1 copy job. This default
applies when the Copy
function or the Quick
Copy function is
initiated from the
printer Home screen.
Default Print Options Paper Selection Select from a list of sizes Configures the default
that the printer supports. paper size used for
print jobs.
Default Print Options Default Custom Paper X Dimension Range: 2.52-12.60 inches Configures the default
Size paper size that is used
Default = 12.60 inches when the user selects
Custom as the paper
size for a print job.

Table 2-42 Print menu (continued)
Default Print Options Default Custom Paper Y Dimension Range: 5-18 inches
Size
Default = 18 inches
Default Print Options Default Custom Paper Use Inches Enabled*

Size
Disabled
Default Print Options Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the original
2-sided document is printed on
one or both sides.
Default Print Options Quality Level Normal* Use to select the level
of desired print quality.
Enhanced
Fine Lines
Default Print Options Edge-to-Edge Normal (recommended)* Use to avoid shadows

that can appear along
Edge-to-Edge output the edges of copies
when the original
document is printed
close to the edges.
PCL and Postscript Suppress Blank Pages Off* This option is for users
Settings who are generating
On their own PCL, which
could include extra
form feeds that would
cause blank pages to
be printed. When the
On option is selected,
form feeds are ignored
if the page is blank.
PCL and Postscript Courier Font Regular Select which version of

Settings the Courier font you
Dark want to use. The
factory default setting
is Regular, which uses
an average stroke
width. The Dark setting
can be used if a heavier
Courier font is needed.
PCL and Postscript Wide A4 Enabled Changes the printable

Settings area of A4-size paper.
Disabled* If you enable this
option, eighty 10-pitch
characters can be
printed on a single line
of A4 paper.
PCL and Postscript Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature to

Settings select whether a
Disabled* PostScript (PS) error
page is printed when
the printer encounters
a PS error.

PCL and Postscript Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a PDF
Settings error page is printed
Disabled* when the printer
encounters a PDF error.
PCL and Postscript Personality Auto* Configures the default

Settings print language or
PCL personality for the
printer. Normally you
PS should not change the
printer language. If you
PDF change the setting to a
specific printer
language, the printer
does not automatically
switch from one
language to another
unless specific
software commands
are sent to it.
PCL and Postscript PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font source
Settings for the user-soft
Disk resident* default font. The list of
available options varies
depending on the
installed printer
options.
PCL and Postscript PCL Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the font
Settings number for the user-
Default = 0 soft default font using
the source that is
specified in the Font
Source menu. The
printer assigns a
number to each font
and lists it on the PCL
font list. The font
number displays in the
Font # column of the
printout.
PCL and Postscript PCL Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source
Settings option and the Font
Default = 10 Number setting
indicate a contour font,
then use this feature to
select a default pitch
(for a fixed-spaced
font).

PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL print-
Settings command options. PCL
Default = 60 is a set of printer
commands that HP
developed to provide
access to printer
features.
Use the Form Length

feature to select the
user soft -default
vertical form length.
PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Orientation Portrait Select the orientation
Settings that is most often used
Landscape for copy or scan
originals. Select the
Portrait option if the
short edge is at the top
or select the
Landscape option if the
long edge is at the top.
PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Symbol Set Select from a list of Select any one of
Settings symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from the
control panel. A symbol
set is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a font.
The factory default
value for this option is
PC-8. Either PC-8 or
PC-850 are
recommended for line-
draw characters.
PCL and Postscript PCL PCL Settings Media Source Mapping Standard* Use to select and
Settings maintain input trays by
Classic number when you are
not using the printer
driver, or when the
software program has
no option for tray
selection. The
following options are
available:
Standard: Tray
numbering is based on
newer HP LaserJet
models.
Classic: Tray
numbering is based on
HP LaserJet 4 and
older models.

Print Quality Adjust Color Tonal Range Highlights Select the tonal range
to adjust.
Midtones
Shadows
Print Quality Adjust Color Cyan Use the arrow keys to

adjust the sliding bar for
Magenta each color.
Yellow
Black
Print Quality Image Registration Tray Tray 1 Specify tray to be

adjusted
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Depends upon the

number of trays
installed

Print Quality Image Registration Front-side -5.00 mm to 5.00 mm Shift the margin
Horizontal Shift alignment to center the
image on the page
Front-side Vertical from top to bottom
Shift and from left to right.
You can also align the
Back-side Horizontal image on the front with
Shift the image printed on
the back.
Back-side Vertical
Shift The direction that is
perpendicular to the
way the paper passes
through the printer is
referred to as X. This is
also known as the scan
direction. X1 is the
scan direction for a
single-sided page or
for the second side of a
two-sided page. X2 is
the scan direction for
the first side of a two-
sided page.
The direction that the

paper feeds through
the printer is referred
to as Y. Y1 is the feed
direction for a single-
sided page or for the
second side of a two-
sided page. Y2 is the
feed direction for the
first side of a two-sided
page.
Use the Adjust Tray

<X> menu to adjust the
registration settings
for each tray. Before
adjusting these values,
print a registration test
page. It provides
alignment guides in the
X and Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments are
necessary. You can
adjust values for X1
Shift, X2 Shift, Y1 Shift,
and Y2 Shift.
Print Quality Image Registration Print Test Page Use the Print Test Page
option to print a page
to test the image
registration. It provides
alignment guides in the
X and Y directions so
you can determine
which adjustments are
necessary.

Print Quality Auto Sense Behavior Tray 1 Sense every page
Sense first page
Sense transparency only
Print Quality Auto Sense Behavior All Other Trays Sense first page
Sense transparency only
Print Quality Adjust Paper types Select from a list of paper

types
Reset Paper Types
Print Quality Optimize Normal Paper Standard
Smooth
Print Quality Optimize Heavy paper Standard
Smooth
Print Quality Optimize Envelope control Normal
Reduced Temp
Print Quality Optimize Tray 1 Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Background Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Uniformity Control Normal
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3
Print Quality Optimize Cac03 Off
On
Print Quality Optimize Best Normal Off
On
Print Quality Optimize Tracking Control Off
On
Print Quality Optimize Registration Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Transfer Control Normal
Alternate 1

Print Quality Optimize Moisture Control Normal
Alternate
Print Quality Optimize Reset Optimize Reset
Print Quality Edge Control Off
Light
Normal*
Maximum
Manage Trays Use Requested Tray Exclusively* Controls how the

printer handles jobs
When available that have specified a
specific input tray. Two
options are available:
Exclusively: The printer

never selects a
different tray when the
user has indicated that
a specific tray should
be used, even if that
tray is empty.
When available: The

printer pulls from
another tray if the
specified tray is empty,
even though the
specific tray was
indicated for the job.
Manage Trays Manually Feed Prompt Always* Indicate whether a

prompt should appear
Prompt on mismatch when the type or size
for a job does not
match the specified
tray and the printer
pulls from the
multipurpose tray
instead. Two options
are available:
Always: A prompt
always displays before
using the multipurpose
tray.
Prompt on mismatch: A
prompt displays only if
the size or type do not
match or the tray is
empty.

Manage Trays Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether the

tray configuration
Do not display message displays
whenever a tray is
closed. Two options are
available:
Display: Shows the tray

configuration message
when a tray is closed.
The user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly from
this message.
Do not display:
Prevents the tray
configuration message
from automatically
appearing.
Manage Trays Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on or off

the control panel
Do not allow prompt to select
another tray when the
specified tray is empty.
Two options are
available:
Allow: When this option

is selected the user is
prompted to either add
paper to the selected
tray or to choose a
different tray. This is
the factory default.
Do not allow: When this

option is selected, the
user is not given the
option of selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts the
user to add paper to
the tray that was
initially selected.

Manage Trays Alternative Letterhead Disabled* Use to load letterhead

Mode or preprinted paper
Enabled into the tray the same
way for all print jobs,
whether you are
printing to one side of
the sheet or to both
sides of the sheet.
When this option is
selected, load the
paper as you would for
printing on both sides.
See the user
documentation that
came with the printer
for instructions about
loading letterhead for
When this option is
selected, the printer
speed slows to the
speed required for
Manage Trays Duplex Blank Pages Automatic* Controls how the

printer handles two-
Always sided jobs (duplexing).
Two options are
available:
Automatic: Choose this

option to skip printing
blank sides during a
two-sided print job.
The printer can print
jobs faster when blank
sides are skipped.
Always: Choose this

option to print all sides
of a two-sided job,
even if one side is
blank. This might be
preferable for certain
jobs that use paper
types such as
letterhead or
prepunched paper.

Manage Trays Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size

paper when an A4 job
No is sent but no A4-size
paper is loaded in the
printer (or to print on
A4 paper when a
letter-size job is sent
but no letter-size
paper is loaded). This
option will also
override A3 with
ledger-size paper and
ledger with A3-size
paper.
Manage Trays Unsupported Size Use default size Use this feature to
Behavior automatically* identify the desired
behavior when printing
Prompt for user response a document on a paper
size that the printer
does not support.
Manage Trays Rotate Offset Automatic* Allows printing of

multiple copies of a
Off print job in alternate
orientations. For
example, the first copy
outputs in landscape
orientation, the second
outputs in portrait
orientation, the third in
landscape, and so on.
This feature works only
with Letter or A4-sized
paper and requires the
use of at least two
paper trays. One tray is
loaded to feed paper in
the long-edge
orientation and the
other is loaded to feed
paper in the short-
edge orientation.
Manage Supplies menu
Review the following information about the Manage Supplies menu in the Settings menu.
then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Manage Supplies, and then press the OK button.

Table 2-43 Manage Supplies menu
Low Warning Thresholds Yellow Cartridge 1-100% Set the estimated percentage at
which the printer notifies you when
Magenta Cartridge Default = 5% a toner cartridge is very low.
Cyan Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Low Warning Threshold Message On Displays a message on the control

panel when a cartridge is very low.
Off
Very Low Behavior Color Cartridges Stop
Black Cartridge Continue
Drums 1-3 Prompt to continue
Drum 4
Transfer Kit
Fuser Kit
Restrict Color Use Enable color Use this feature to enable, restrict,
or disable color printing.
Color if allowed*
Disable color
Color/Black Mix Auto Instructs the printer when to switch

between color and monochrome
Mostly color pages printing modes for the best overall
performance.
Mostly black pages
Auto: Uses the mode that is
appropriate for the first page of the
job. If necessary, the printer
switches modes during the middle
of a job and then stays in that mode
until the job is finished.
Mostly color pages: The printer uses

color mode for all jobs, even if the
job contains no color pages.
Mostly black pages: The printer

uses monochrome mode until it
detects a color page. The printer
switches back to monochrome
mode when it detects a sequence of
several monochrome pages.

Table 2-43 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
Store Usage Data On supplies Store Usage Data provides a way to

suppress the toner cartridges from
Not on supplies storing most of the information
gathered exclusively for the
purpose of understanding the
usage of the printer. Select the On
supplies setting to store the data on
the toner cartridge memory chip.
Select the Not on supplies setting to
suppress the information from
being stored on the memory chip.
Cartridge Protection Off* Select to permanently protect

cartridges so that they can be used
Protect Cartridges only in this product or fleet of
products.
Cartridge Policy Off* Set Authorized HP to allow only

genuine HP cartridges to be used in
Authorized HP this printer.
Networking menu
Review the following information about the Networking menu in the Settings menu.
then select OK. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Networking, and then press the OK button.
Table 2-44 Networking menu

Ethernet Information Print Security Report Yes Yes: Prints a page that
contains the current
No* security settings on
the HP Jetdirect print
server.
No: A security settings

page is not printed.
Ethernet TCP/IP Host Name Use the arrow buttons An alphanumeric

to edit the host name. string, up to 32
characters, used to
NPIXXXXXX* identify the printer.
This name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration page.
The default host name
is NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the last six
digits of the LAN
hardware (MAC)
address.

Table 2-44 Networking menu (continued)
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Config Method Bootp Specifies the method
that TCP/IPv4
DHCP* parameters will be
configured on the HP
Auto IP Jetdirect print server.
Manual Bootp (Bootstrap

Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from a
BootP server.
DHCP (Dynamic Host

Configuration
Protocol): Use for
automatic
configuration from a
DHCPv4 server. If
selected and a DHCP
lease exists, the DHCP
Release menu and the
DHCP Renew menu are
available to set DHCP
lease options.
Auto IP: Use for

automatic link-local
IPv4 addressing. An
address in the form
169.254.x.x is
assigned
automatically.
If you set this option to

the Manual setting, use
the Manual Settings
menu to configure
TCP/IPv4 parameters.

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Default IP Auto IP* Specify the IP address
to default to when the
Legacy print server is unable
to obtain an IP address
from the network
during a forced TCP/IP
reconfiguration (for
example, when
manually configured to
use BootP or DHCP).
NOTE: This feature

assigns a static IP
address that might
interfere with a
managed network.
Auto IP: A link-local IP

address 169.254.x.x is
set.
Legacy: The address

192.0.0.192 is set,
consistent with older
HP Jetdirect printers.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Release Yes
No*
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings DHCP Renew Yes
No*
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV4 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP address
(n.n.n.n) of a Primary
Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx Domain Name System
(DNS) Server.
Ethernet IPV4 Settings Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP address
(n.n.n.n) of a
Default = 0.0.0.0 Secondary DNS Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Enable Off Use this item to enable
or disable IPv6
On* operation on the print
server.
Off: IPv6 is disabled.
On: IPv6 is enabled.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Address Manual Settings Use this item to enable
and manually
Enable configure a TCP/IPv6
address.
Address

Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings DHCPV6 Policy Router Specified Router Specified: The
stateful auto-
Router Unavailable* configuration method
to be used by the print
Always server is determined
by a router. The router
specifies whether the
print server obtains its
address, its
configuration
information, or both
from a DHCPv6 server.
Router Unavailable: If a
router is not available,
the print server should
attempt to obtain its
stateful configuration
Always: Whether a
router is available, the
print server always
attempts to obtain its
stateful configuration
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Primary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP address
(n.n.n.n) of a Primary
Default = xxx.xxx.xx.xx Domain Name System
(DNS) Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP IPV6 Settings Secondary DNS Range: 0-255 Specify the IP address
(n.n.n.n) of a
Default = 0.0.0.0 Secondary DNS Server.
Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Server Select from a provided Specifies the proxy
list. server to be used by
embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy server
is typically used by
network clients for
Internet access. It
caches Web pages, and
provides a degree of
Internet security for
those clients.
To specify a proxy
server, enter its IPv4
address or fully-
qualified domain
name. The name can
be up to 255 octets.
For some networks,

you might need to
contact your Internet
Service Provider (ISP)
for the proxy server
address.

Ethernet TCP/IP Proxy Port Range: 1-65535 Enter the port number
used by the proxy
Default = 00080 server for client
support. The port
number identifies the
port reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can be a
value from 0 to 65535.
Ethernet TCP/IP Idle Timeout Range: 1-3600 The time period, in

seconds, after which
Default = 0270 an idle TCP print data
connection is closed
(default is 270
seconds, 0 disables the
timeout).
Supplies menu
Review the following information about the Supplies menu.
To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Supplies, and
then select OK.
Table 2-45 Supplies menu
First level Values Description
Supplies Summary View a summary of the status of all printer

supplies.
Yellow Cartridge Status Select a supply from the list to see the current
status of the supply, the part number used to
Magenta Cartridge Order HP Part order a replacement, the number of pages
printed, and the approximate number of pages
Cyan Cartridge Pages Printed remaining.
Drum 1 Approximate Pages Remaining
Drum 2
Drum 3
Drum 4
Black Cartridge
Toner Collection Unit Status Select a part from the list to see the current
status of the part and the part number used to
Transfer Kit Order HP Part order a replacement.
Fuser Kit
Trays menu
Review the following information about the Trays menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Trays, and then
select OK.
Table 2-46 Trays menu
Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list of Choose the paper size for the tray
supported sizes.
Tray 2-x
Tray 1 Type Select paper type from a list of Choose the paper type for the tray.
supported types.
Tray 2-x

Support Tools menu
The menus under the Support Tools menu contain the options for maintaining the printer and troubleshooting
printer problems. Learn about these menus and settings.
● Maintenance menu
● Troubleshooting menu

Maintenance menu
The menus under the Maintenance menu contain the options for backing up and restoring data, calibrating the
printer, and upgrading firmware. Learn about these menus and settings.
● Backup/Restore menu
● Calibration/Cleaning menu
● USB Firmware Upgrade menu
● Service menu
Backup/Restore menu
Review the following information about the Backup/Restore menu.
To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Support Tools,
and then select OK. Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK. Navigate to Backup/Restore, and then select
OK.
Table 2-47 Backup/Restore menu
Back up Data Back up Data Back up Now Initiate a backup. You will be
prompted to enter a password to
Cancel encrypt the file.
Restore Data Insert a USB flash drive that Restore data from an external
contains the backup file in to the source.
USB port near the control panel.
Calibration/Cleaning menu
Review the following information about the Calibration/Cleaning menu.
and then select OK. Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK. Navigate to Calibration/Cleaning, and then
select OK.
Table 2-48 Calibration/Cleaning menu

Cleaning Page Automatic Cleaning Interval Use this menu to configure the settings for the
product to automatically print a cleaning page.
Off*
Select Off to disable automatic cleaning.
1000 pages
Select a cleaning interval to set the number of
2000 pages pages to be printed before an automatic cleaning
page is printed.
5000 pages
Touch Print to manually print a cleaning page.
10000 pages
NOTE:
20000 pages

Table 2-48 Calibration/Cleaning menu (continued)
Quick Calibration Start The product automatically calibrates itself at

various times. However, you can calibrate the
Cancel product immediately if you see problems with
print quality. Use this feature to perform a partial
calibration. Use this calibration if color density or
tone seems incorrect.
Before calibrating the product, make sure that

the Ready indicator displays on the control panel
display. If a job is in progress, the calibration
occurs when that job is complete.
Full Calibration Start The product automatically calibrates itself at

various times. However, you can calibrate the
Cancel product immediately if you see problems with
print quality. Use this feature to perform a full
calibration, which can take up to three minutes.
Use this calibration if the color layers seem
Before calibrating the product, make sure that

the Ready indicator displays on the control panel
display. If a job is in progress, the calibration
occurs when that job is complete.
Power On Calibration No delay This feature controls the timing of calibration

when the printer wakes up or is turned on.
Delay 15 minutes
Prepare for Shipping Select Start to initiate a cleaning sequence that

helps prepare the product for shipping. Excess
toner will be transferred into the Toner Collection
Unit to keep loose toner contained during
shipping. This process takes about 2 minutes.
Reset Calibration Reset Use this feature to return the product to the
factory-set default values for color calibration.
Cancel
Select Reset to reset the color calibration. The
printer will restart with the factory-set defaults.
Select Cancel to close the menu without

resetting the color calibration.
USB Firmware Upgrade menu
Review the following information about the USB Firmware Upgrade menu.
and then select OK. Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK. Navigate to USB Firmware Upgrade, and then
select OK.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Service menu
Review the following information about the Service menu.

and then select OK. Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK. Navigate to Service, and then select OK.
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service
personnel. See the Service mode function section in the printer troubleshooting manual.
Troubleshooting menu
Review the following information about the Troubleshooting menu.
and then select OK. Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK. Navigate to Troubleshooting, and then select
OK.
Table 2-49 Troubleshooting menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description
Reports Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Select the desired report
and then select the print
Current Settings Page
icon to print the page.
Configuration Page
How to Connect Page
Supplies Status Page
Usage Page
File Directory Page
Web Services Status Page
Color Usage Job Log
Reports Configuration/Status Pages Other Pages Demonstration Page Select the desired report
and then select the print
RBG Samples
icon to print the page.
CMYK Samples
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Print Quality Pages PQ Troubleshooting Pages Print Use to print pages that can
help you resolve problems
with print quality.
Print Quality Pages Diagnostics Page Print Use to print a diagnostics

page. The page includes
color swatches, diagnostic
information, and calibration
information.
Print Quality Pages Color Band Test Print Use to print a page that
helps you resolve problems
with print quality.

Table 2-49 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Event Log Print Use to print a list of the 50

most recent events in the
Cancel event log. For each event,
the printed log shows the
error number, page count,
error code, and description
or personality.
Paper Path Page Print Shows how many pages

were printed from each tray.
Diagnostic Tests Disable Cartridge Check Continue Use this diagnostic test to
print internal pages or send
an external job to the
printer when the toner
cartridge is removed or
exchanged. Supply errors
are ignored while the printer
is in this mode.
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Number of Copies Range: 1-500 Sets the default number of
copies for a copy job. This
Default = 1 default applies when the
Copy or Quick Copy function
is initiated from the printer
Home screen. The factory
default setting is 1.
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Paper Tray Select from a list of the Generates a test page for
available trays. testing paper handling
features. You can define the
path that is used for the test
in order to test specific
paper paths.
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Test Output Sides 1-sided*
2-sided
Diagnostic Tests Print/Stop Test Stop Next Print Job*
Delay
Diagnostic Tests Paper Path Sensor Test Select from a list of the Initiates a test of the paper
printer sensors. path sensors.
Diagnostic Tests Manual Sensor Test Select from a list of Test the printer sensors and
available components. switches for correct
operation. Each sensor is
Reset Sensors displayed on the control
panel screen, along with its
status. Manually trip each
sensor and watch for it to
change on the screen.
Select the Stop button to
abort the test.

Table 2-49 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
Diagnostic Tests Component Test Select from a list of Use this item to exercise
available components. individual parts
independently to isolate
Repeat noise, leaking, or other
issues. To start the test,
select one of the
components. The test will
run the number of times
specified by the Repeat
option. The user might be
prompted to remove parts
from the printer during the
test. Select the Stop button
to abort the test.
Generate Debug Data Start
Retrieve Diagnostics Data Send to email Create files that contain

information about the
printer that can help identify
the cause of problems.
Job Storage menu

Review the following information about the Job Storage menu.
To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Job Storage,
and then select OK.
Table 2-50 Job Storage menu
Stored Job to Print Choose job to print Print Print a stored job.
Choose number of copies
USB Drive menu

Review the following information about the USB Drive menu.
To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to USB Drive, and
then select OK.
Table 2-51 USB Drive menu
USB File to Print Choose file to print Print Print a file from a USB drive.
Choose number of copies
Job Log menu

Review the following information about the Job Log menu.

To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Job Log, and
then select OK.
Table 2-52 Job Log menu
Job Types All jobs Print Log View or print a log of stored jobs.
Print jobs
Encrypted jobs
My jobs
Access menu
Review the following information about the Access menu.
To display: From the Home screen on the printer control panel, use the arrow keys to navigate to Access, and
then select OK.
Table 2-53 Access menu
High Contrast On Increase the contrast between light and dark

content on the screen.
Off
Invert Colors On Invert the colors on the screen.
Off
Screen Zoom Off Magnify the screen content by zooming in and

out.
125%
150%
200%

Error code and control panel message troubleshooting overview
Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current printer status
or situations that might require action.
● Error codes
● How to search for printer documentation
Error codes
Error codes indicate the current printer status or situations that might require action.
Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).
● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error. For
example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.
● The remaining four characters (WX, Y, and Z values) further define the error.
HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message document
(CPMD) for each printer
The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or resolve the
error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.
The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error codes.
Table 2-54 Error codes: The first two characters

Error code System component System error description
10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error
11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the

formatter.
13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.
15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.
17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.
20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.
21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression

error when trying to process job.
30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the

unit.
31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.
32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or

error.
33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or error.
40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.

Table 2-54 Error codes: The first two characters (continued)
41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically
involving (but not limited to) the fuser, the
laser scanner, or the paper path.
42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log,

Shell, System Manager, or other
component.
44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.
45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the

OXPd Web Kit (communications log).
46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.
47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.
48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.
49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.
50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.
51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.
52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.
54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).
55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.
56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.
57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.
58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.
59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.
60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.
61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide and LaserJet) Print engine error with the 8–bit data
package.
62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.
Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.
63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical,

communication, etc.).
65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.
66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.
67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error.
69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.
70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.
80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.

Table 2-54 Error codes: The first two characters (continued)
81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.
82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.
90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB,

display) or interconnection error.
98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.
99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware

install (engine or accessory), or disk error
How to search for printer documentation

Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals.
The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP portals
GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available to call agents,
service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend on your access
credentials.
How to search WISE for printer documentation
These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users. View a
video of how to find support content in WISE.
To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to locate
CPMD list.
Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.
How to search GCSN for printer documentation
These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find support content in
GCSN, or follow the steps below.
1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:
– Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or
– On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.

Figure 2-104 GCSN home page
2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model (leave
the Model field as blank or the default).
NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.
Figure 2-105 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)

3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to bypass the
Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).
Figure 2-106 Add favorites (GCSN)
4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.
Figure 2-107 Clear search criteria (GCSN)
5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.
NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which type of
manual or guide the content might be listed.
Figure 2-108 Select search criteria (GCSN)
6. Select Submit.
7. – If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search result
is 100 documents).

NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model. All
other available content is filtered out.
Table 2-55 Information type selections
Technical information type Select this checkbox
Control panel message document (CPMD) CPMD-Map
List of all CPMDs per product Support Information
Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide
Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual
Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual
Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information
User manual or User guide User Guide
Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement

Resolve print-quality problems
Use the information below to troubleshoot print-quality problems, including issues with image quality and color
quality.
● Introduction
● Resolve print-quality problems
Introduction
quality.
The troubleshooting steps can help resolve the following defects:
● Blank pages
● Black pages
● Colors that do not align
● Curled paper
● Dark or light bands
● Dark or light streaks
● Fuzzy print
● Gray background or dark print
● Light print
● Loose toner
● Missing toner
● Scattered dots of toner
● Skewed images
● Smears
● Streaks
ENWW Resolve print-quality problems 297

Resolve print-quality problems
quality.
● Print from a different software program
● Check the paper-type setting for the print job
● Check toner-cartridge status
● Print a cleaning page
● Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges
● Check paper and the printing environment
● Try a different print driver
● Calibrate the printer to align the colors
● Troubleshoot image defects
Print from a different software program

Try printing from a different software program. If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software
program from which you were printing.

Check the paper-type setting for the print job
Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the printed pages have smears, fuzzy
or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing toner.
● Check the paper type setting on the control panel
● Check the paper type setting (Windows)
● Check the paper type setting (macOS)
Check the paper type setting on the control panel
Check the paper type setting on the printer control panel, and change the setting as needed.
1. Open and close the paper tray.
2. Follow the control panel prompts to confirm or modify the paper type and size settings for the tray.
3. Make sure the paper loaded meets specifications.
4. Adjust the humidity and resistance setting on the control panel to match the environment.
a. Open the following menus:
1. Settings
2. Print quality
3. Adjust paper type
b. Select the paper type that matches the type loaded in the tray.
c. Use the arrows to increase or decrease the humidity and resistance setting.
5. Make sure the driver settings match the control panel settings.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
Check the paper type setting (Windows)
Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed.
NOTE: The print driver settings will override any control panel settings.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.
6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.
8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the OK button
to print the job.

Check the paper type setting (macOS)
Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages.
4. Open the menus drop-down list, and then click the Paper/Quality menu.
5. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.
6. Click the Print button.

Check toner-cartridge status
Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges and if applicable, the status of
other replaceable maintenance parts.
● Step one: Print the supplies status page
● Step two: Check supplies status
Step one: Print the supplies status page
The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.
2. Select the Configuration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select Supplies Status Page, and then, select Print to print the page.
Step two: Check supplies status
Check the supplies status report as follows.
1. Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining for the toner cartridges and, if
applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts.
Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. The
supplies status page indicates when a supply level is very low. After an HP supply has reached the very low
threshold, HP’s premium protection warranty on that supply has ended.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.
Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other replaceable maintenance parts, the
supplies status page lists the genuine HP part numbers.
2. Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge.
A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on it. For more information on
identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
Print a cleaning page

During the printing process paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and can cause
print-quality issues such as toner specks or spatter, smears, streaks, lines, or repeating marks. Follow these
steps to clean the printer's paper path.
1. Load plain paper in Tray 1.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
3. Select the following menus:

● Maintenance
● Calibration/Cleaning
● Cleaning Page
4. Select Print to print the page.
A Cleaning... message displays on the printer control panel. The cleaning process takes a few minutes to
complete. Do not turn the printer off until the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the
printed page.
Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges

Follow these steps to inspect each toner cartridge.
1. Remove the toner cartridges from the printer, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.
2. Check the memory chip for damage.
3. Examine the surface of the green imaging drum.
CAUTION: Do not touch the imaging drum. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality
problems.
4. If you see any scratches, fingerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the toner cartridge.
5. Reinstall the toner cartridge, and print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.

Check paper and the printing environment
Use the following information to check the paper selection and the printing environment.
● Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications
● Step two: Check the environment
● Step three: Set the individual tray alignment
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specifications
Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP specifications.
● Always use a paper type and weight that this printer supports.
● Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids,
staples, and curled or bent edges.
● Use paper that has not been previously printed on.
● Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.
● Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in Inkjet
printers.
● Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.
Step two: Check the environment
The environment can directly affect print quality and is a common cause for print-quality or paper-feeding
issues. Try the following solutions:
● Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors, or air-conditioning vents.
● Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of printer specifications.
● Do not place the printer in a confined space, such as a cabinet.
● Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.
● Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer requires good air flow on all sides,
including the top.
● Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other elements that can leave residue
inside the printer.
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment
Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when printing
from specific trays.
Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when printing
from specific trays.
1. Load plain paper in Tray 1.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

● Copy/Print or Print
● Print Quality
● Image Registration
4. Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.
5. Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.
6. Select Print Test Page again to verify the results, and then make further adjustments if necessary.
7. Select Done to save the new settings.
Try a different print driver

Try a different print driver when printing from a software program and the printed pages have unexpected lines
in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.
Download any of the following drivers from the HP Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM751 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE75245 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM856 or http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljE85055 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
Table 2-56 Print drivers
Print driver Description
HP PCL 6 V3 driver This printer-specific print driver supports Windows 7 and newer
operating systems that support version 3 drivers. For a list of
supported operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/support.
HP PCL-6 V4 driver This product-specific print driver supports Windows 8 and newer
operating systems that support version 4 drivers. For a list of
supported operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/support.
HP UPD PS driver ● Recommended for printing with Adobe software programs or

with other highly graphics-intensive software programs
● Provides support for printing from postscript emulation

needs, or for postscript flash font support
NOTE: For the most consistent results, HP recommends

downloading Adobe Reader and running it from a computer, rather
than using the web-based software.
HP UPD PCL 6 ● Recommended for printing in all Windows environments
● Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer

feature support for most users
● Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface

(GDI) for best speed in Windows environments
● Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom

software programs that are based on PCL 5
Calibrate the printer to align the colors

Calibration is a printer function that optimizes print quality. Follow these steps to resolve print-quality problems
such as misaligned color, colored shadows, blurry graphics, or other print-quality issues.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
● Maintenance
● Calibration/Cleaning
● Full Calibration
3. Select Start to start the calibration process.
A Calibrating message will display on the printer control panel. The calibration process takes a few minutes
to complete. Do not turn the printer off until the calibration process has finished.
4. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try printing again.
Troubleshoot image defects

Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.
Table 2-57 Image defects table quick reference

Defect Defect Defect
Table 2-66 Light print on page 312 Table 2-64 Gray background or dark print Table 2-60 Blank page — No print on page 308
on page 311

Table 2-57 Image defects table quick reference (continued)
Defect Defect Defect
Table 2-59 Black page on page 308 Table 2-58 Banding defects on page 307 Table 2-68 Streak defects on page 314
Table 2-63 Fixing/fuser defects on page 310 Table 2-65 Image placement defects Table 2-61 Color plane registrations defects
on page 311 (color models only) on page 309
Table 2-62 Wrong color on page 309 Table 2-67 Output defects on page 313
Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps as a
starting point for solving image defect issues.

1. Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely with
continued printing.
2. Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very Low state (it has passed the
rated life), replace the cartridge.
3. Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in the tray. Try using
a different ream of media or a different tray. Try using a different print mode.
4. Make sure that the printer is within the supported operating temperature/humidity range.
5. Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are supported by the printer. See the printer support page
at support.hp.com for a list of the supported paper sizes and types for the printer.
NOTE: The term “fusing” refers to the part of the printing process where toner is affixed to paper.
The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the printer short-edge first.
Table 2-58 Banding defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Dark or light lines which repeat down the 1. Reprint the document.
length of the page, and are wide-pitch
and/or impulse bands. They might be sharp 2. Try printing from another tray.
or soft in nature. The defect displays only in
areas of fill, not in text or sections with no 3. Replace the cartridge.
printed content.
4. Use a different paper type.
5. Enterprise models only: From the

Home screen on the printer control
panel, go to the Adjust Paper Types
menu, and then choose a print mode
that is designed for a slightly heavier
media than what you are using. This
slows the print speed and might
improve the print quality.
6. If the issue persists, go to

support.hp.com.

Table 2-59 Black page
The entire printed page is black. 1. Visually inspect the cartridge to check
for damage.
2. Make sure that the cartridge is

installed correctly.
3. Replace the cartridge

support.hp.com.
Table 2-60 Blank page — No print
The page is completely blank and contains 1. Make sure that the cartridges are
no printed content. genuine HP cartridges.

3. Print with a different cartridge.
4. Check the paper type in the paper tray

and adjust the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select a lighter
paper type.

support.hp.com.

Table 2-61 Color plane registrations defects (color models only)
One or more color plane(s) is not aligned 1. Reprint the document.

with the other color planes. This registration
error will typically occur with yellow. 2. From the printer control panel,
calibrate the printer.
3. If a cartridge has reached a Very Low

state, or the printed output is severely
faded, replace the cartridge.
4. From the printer control panel use the

Restore Calibration feature to reset
the printer's calibration settings to the
factory defaults.

support.hp.com.
Table 2-62 Wrong color
One or more colors does not print the 1. Reprint the document.
correct color.
2. From the printer control panel,
calibrate the printer.
3. If a cartridge or imaging drum has

reached a Very Low state, or the
printed output is severely faded,
replace the cartridge or drum.
4. From the printer control panel use the

Restore Calibration feature to reset
the printer's calibration settings to the
factory defaults.
5. Verify that the printer does not have a

custom color table loaded.

support.hp.com.

Table 2-63 Fixing/fuser defects
Slight shadows or offsets of the image are 1. Reprint the document.

repeated down the page. The repeated
image might fade with each recurrence. 2. Check the paper type in the paper tray
and adjust the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select a lighter
paper type.

support.hp.com.
Toner rubs off along either edge of the 1. Reprint the document.
page. This defect is more common at the
edges of high-coverage jobs, and on light 2. Check the paper type in the paper tray
media types, but can occur anywhere on the and adjust the printer settings to
page. match. If necessary, select a heavier
paper type.

printer control panel, go to the Edge-
to-Edge menu and then select
Normal. Reprint the document.

printer control panel, select Auto
Include Margins and then reprint the
document.
5. Verify that the printed content is not

outside the printable region of the
printer.

support.hp.com.

Table 2-64 Gray background or dark print
The image or text is darker than expected 1. Make sure that the paper in the trays
and/or the background is gray. has not already been run through the
printer.
2. Use a different paper type.
3. Reprint the document.
4. Mono models only: From the Home

screen on the printer control panel, go
to the Adjust Toner Density menu, and
then adjust the toner density to a
lower level.
5. Make sure that the printer is within the

supported operating temperature and
humidity range.
6. Replace the cartridge.

support.hp.com.
Table 2-65 Image placement defects
The image is not centered, or is skewed on 1. Reprint the document.

the page. The defect occurs when the paper
is not positioned properly as it is pulled from 2. Remove the paper and then reload the
the tray and moves through the paper path. tray. Make sure that all the paper
edges are even on all sides.
3. Make sure that the top of the paper

stack is below the tray-full indicator.
Do not overfill the tray.
4. Make sure that the paper guides are

adjusted to the correct size for the
paper. Do not adjust the paper guides
tightly against the paper stack. Adjust
them to the indentations or markings
in the tray.

support.hp.com.

Table 2-66 Light print
The printed content is light or faded on the 1. Reprint the document.

entire page.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
it to redistribute the toner.
3. Mono models only: Make sure that the

EconoMode setting is disabled, both at
the printer control panel and in the
print driver.

5. Print a Supplies Status Page and check

the life and usage of the cartridge.
6. Replace the cartridge.

support.hp.com.

Table 2-67 Output defects
Printed pages have curled edges. The curled 1. Reprint the document.
edge can be along the short or long side of
the paper. Two types of curl are possible: 2. Positive curl: From the printer control
panel, select a heavier paper type. The
● Positive curl: The paper curls toward heavier paper type creates a higher
the printed side. The defect occurs in temperature for printing.
dry environments or when printing
high-coverage pages. Negative curl: From the printer control
panel, select a lighter paper type. The
● Negative curl: The paper curls away lighter paper type creates a lower
from the printed side. The defect temperature for printing. Try storing
occurs in high-humidity environments the paper in a dry environment prior to
or when printing low-coverage pages. use, or use freshly-opened paper.
3. Print in duplex mode.

support.hp.com.
The paper does not stack well in the output 1. Reprint the document.
tray. The stack might be uneven, skewed, or
the pages might be pushed out of the tray 2. Extend the output bin extension.
and onto the floor. Any of the following
conditions can cause this defect: 3. If the defect is caused by extreme
paper curl, refer to the
● Extreme paper curl troubleshooting steps for "Output
curl."
● The paper in the tray is wrinkled or
deformed 4. Use a different paper type.
● The paper is a non-standard paper 5. Use freshly-opened paper.

type, such as envelopes
6. Remove the paper from the output
● The output tray is too full tray before the tray gets too full.

support.hp.com.

Table 2-68 Streak defects
Light vertical streaks that usually span the 1. Reprint the document.
length of the page. The defect displays only
in areas of fill, not in text or sections with no 2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
printed content. it to redistribute the toner.

support.hp.com.
NOTE: Both light and dark vertical streaks

can occur when the printing environment is
outside the specified range for temperature
or humidity. Refer to your printer's
environmental specifications for allowable
temperature and humidity levels.
Dark vertical lines which occur down the 1. Reprint the document.
length of the page. The defect might occur
anywhere on the page, in areas of fill or in 2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
sections with no printed content. On color it to redistribute the toner.
models, these lines or streaks will also be
visible on the ITB cleaning page. 3. Print a cleaning page.
4. Check the toner level in the cartridge.

support.hp.com.

Print quality troubleshooting guide
Review the following information about print quality troubleshooting.
● Repetitive image defect ruler
ENWW Print quality troubleshooting guide 315

Repetitive image defect ruler
Review the following information about a repetitive image defect ruler.
● Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects
When troubleshooting the source of some print image defects, one solution is to identify if it is a repetitive
defect (does the print quality defect appear multiple times on the printed page?). If this is the case, use a ruler to
measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems. For more information,
see Using a ruler to measure between repetitive defects.
Use a ruler to measure occurrences of repetitive image defects to help solve image-quality problems. Place the
ruler next to the first occurrence of the defect on the page. Find the distance between identical defects and use
the table below to identify the component that is causing the defect.
IMPORTANT: Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth. If dirt is
difficult to remove, rub the roller with a lint-free cloth that has been dampened with water.
NOTE: Defects on the tray pickup rollers or the Tray 1 pickup roller do not cause a repetitive defect. Defects on
these rollers cause a defect to appear only on the leading edge of the image.
TIP: To make a printer specific repetitive defect ruler, use a metric ruler to transfer the measurements in the
table below to a transparency or the edge of a piece of paper—clearly label each ruler mark with the associated
defective assembly.
NOTE: The primary charging roller, photosensitive drum, and developer roller cannot be cleaned because they
are internal assemblies in the toner cartridge or imaging drum. If one of these assemblies is causing the defect,
replace the toner cartridge or the imaging drum.
Table 2-69 Repetitive defects
Assembly Distance between defects
Developer roller 26 mm (1.02 in)
Primary charging roller 34 mm (1.34 in)
Photosensitive drum 94 mm (3.70 in)
Registration roller 42 mm (1.65 in)
Secondary transfer roller 56 mm (2.20 in)
Fuser film 77 mm (3.03 in)
Pressure roller 83 mm (3.27 in)
Use a ruler to measure between repetitive defects

The figures in this section show color repetitive defect pages. However, the process for measuring repetitive
defects is valid for mono pages.
1. Identify a repetitive defect on the page.
TIP: Print a cleaning page to see if that resolves the defect.
NOTE: Some printers allow loading Letter and A4 media in short-edge-first or long-edge-first orientation
in the paper trays. When measuring repetitive defects, make sure to place the ruler at the leading edge of
the page. This is the edge of the page that feeds into the printer first.

The example pages below show the following types of repetitive defects.
● Lines (callout 1)
● Smudges (callout 2)
● Dots or spots (callout 3)
Figure 2-109 Examples of repetitive defects
1 2
3
NOTE: These are examples only, other types of repetitive defects might appear on a page.

2. Position a metric ruler on the page with the “zero” ruler mark at one occurrence of the defect (callout 1).
Figure 2-110 Place the ruler on the page
3. Locate the next occurrence of the defect (callout 1).
Figure 2-111 Locate the next repetitive defect

4. Measure the distance (in millimeters) between the two occurrences (callout 1), and then use the Repetitive
defects table to determine the defective assembly.
TIP: Always measure from and to the same point on the defects. For example, if the ruler is “zeroed” at
the top edge of a defect, measure to the top edge of the next occurrence of that defect.
Figure 2-112 Determine the defective assembly

Clean the printer
Review the following information about cleaning the printer.
● Clean the paper path
● Print a cleaning page
● Enable and configure auto cleaning
● Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
NOTE: To clean the printer exterior, use a soft, water-moistened cloth.
Clean the paper path

Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the printer. This can cause print-quality problems
during printing. Cleaning the paper path eliminates or reduces these problems.
Clean the paper path and toner-cartridge areas every time that a toner cartridge is changed or whenever print-
quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the printer free from dust and debris.
Print a cleaning page

Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page from the control panel.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.
5. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Cleaning page, and then press the OK button to print the page.
6. Follow the instruction on the printed cleaning page to finish the cleaning page process.
7. A Cleaning... message displays on the printer control panel. The cleaning process takes a few minutes to
complete. Do not turn the printer off until the cleaning process has finished. When it is finished, discard the
printed page.
Enable and configure auto cleaning

Use the procedure in this section to enable and configure the automatic cleaning function from the control panel.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Maintenance, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Calibration/Cleaning, and then press the OK button.
4. Select Cleaning Page.

5. Select the Automatic Cleaning Interval number of pages
6. Select Done.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges

Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can affect
performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks, unwanted
lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer off, and

then disconnect the power cable from the
electrical outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the

document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a
soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with
nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone,
benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon 3
tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can
damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on
the glass or platen. They might seep and damage 2
the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on
copies when you are using the document feeder, 1
be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left
side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
ENWW Clean the printer 321

4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a
chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then
press the power button to turn the printer on.

Solve paper handling problems
Review the following information to solve paper handling problems.
● Printer feeds incorrect page size
● Printer pulls from incorrect tray
● Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly
● Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X
● Output is curled or wrinkled
● Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds
● Inner finisher adjustments (M776zs only)
Printer feeds incorrect page size

Review the following information when the printer feeds an incorrect page size.
Table 2-70 Printer feeds incorrect page size
Cause Solution
The correct size paper is not loaded in the tray. Load the correct size paper in the tray.
The correct size paper is not selected in the software program or Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer driver
printer driver. are correct, because the software program settings override the
printer driver and control panel settings, and the printer driver
settings override the control panel settings.
The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the printer From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the tray.
control panel.
The paper size is not configured correctly for the tray. Print a configuration page to determine the paper size for which the
tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper.
Printer pulls from incorrect tray

Review the following information when the printer pulls from an incorrect tray.
Table 2-71 Printer pulls from incorrect tray
Cause Solution
A driver for a different printer is in use. Use a driver for this printer.
The specified tray is empty. Load paper in the specified tray.
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray. Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the
paper size for which the tray is configured.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
ENWW Solve paper handling problems 323

Printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly
Review the following information when the printer will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly.
Table 2-72 Printer will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly
Cause Solution
The duplex job is trying to use unsupported paper. Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing.
The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing. Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.
The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the letterhead
letterhead. or printed side down, with the top of the page leading into the
printer. For Tray 2-X, load the paper printed side up with the top of
the page toward the right of the printer.
The printer model does not support automatic 2-sided printing. The printer model does not support automatic 2-sided printing.
Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X

Review the following information when the paper does not feed from Tray 2-X.
Table 2-73 Paper does not feed from Tray 2-X
Cause Solution
The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.
The input tray is empty. Load paper in the input tray.
The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the printer control panel, select the correct paper type for the
printer control panel. input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a specific weight
range will not match a print job that specifies an exact weight, even
if the specified weight is within the weight range.
Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path. Closely
inspect the fuser area for jams.
None of the optional trays appear as input tray options. The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that the
printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional trays.
An optional tray is incorrectly installed. Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the
printer.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the guides are touching the paper.
Output is curled or wrinkled

Review the following information when the output is curled or wrinkled.

Table 2-74 Output is curled or wrinkled
Cause Solution
Paper does not meet the specifications for this printer. Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this
printer. Non-recycled, 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper is optimal for office
use.
The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the printer control panel, select the correct paper type for the
printer control panel. input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a specific weight
range will not match a print job that specifies an exact weight, even
if the specified weight is within the weight range.
Paper is damaged or in poor condition. Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in good
condition.
The printer is operating in an excessively humid environment. Verify that the printing environment is within humidity
specifications.
The print job consist of large, solid-filled areas. Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a
different pattern.
Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh, unopened
moisture. package. Store paper in a plastic bag to protect it from humidity.
Paper has poorly cut edges. Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and then
reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem
persists, replace the paper.
The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or selected Configure the software for the paper (see the software
in the software. documentation). Configure the tray for the paper.
The paper has previously been used for a print job. Do not re-use paper.

Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds
Use the following procedures if the printer will not pick up paper or misfeeds paper.
● The printer does not pick up paper
● The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
● Paper does not feed automatically
The printer does not pick up paper

If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.
NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than 20lb plain
paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which increases the
reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the possibility of a mispick jam.
HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from trays
other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20lb plain paper.
1. Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper.
2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.
3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control panel.
4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the
appropriate indentation in the tray.
5. Check the printer control panel to see if the printer is waiting for an acknowledgment to the feed the paper
manually prompt. Load paper, and continue.
6. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened with
warm water.
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper

If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not fan the
paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
2. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.
3. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the
stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the
appropriate indentation in the tray.
6. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.
Paper does not feed automatically

Review the following information when the paper does not feed automatically.

Table 2-75 Paper does not feed automatically
Cause Solution
Manual feed is selected in the software program. Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the OK
button.
The correct size paper is not loaded. Load the correct size paper.
The input tray is empty. Load paper into the input tray.
Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the printer and remove any paper in the paper path.
The guides in the tray are not against the paper. Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the paper.

Inner finisher adjustments (M776zs only)
Use the following procedures to adjust the alignment of pages, the position of staples, and the pressure of the
return roller on the inner finisher.
● Open the Finisher Calibration menu
● Align the inner finisher output stack joggers
● Adjust the inner finisher return belt tension
● Adjust the inner finisher stapler alignment
Open the Finisher Calibration menu

Use the following procedure to open the Finisher Calibration.
2. Open the Service menu:
NOTE: After entering the PIN, select Sign In.
● M776: 10077619
5. Scroll to and touch the Finisher Calibration menu.
Align the inner finisher output stack joggers

If the printed output delivered to the output bin in the inner finisher is not aligned properly, the position of the
joggers can be adjusted to compensate for the misalignment.
IMPORTANT: The adjustments described here are only necessary if parts are replaced or other repairs are done
on an inner finisher. They are not required for a new inner finisher.
1. Open the Finisher Calibration menu in the Service menu.
2. Select Jogger Alignment.
3. Select Paper Size.
4. Select Print Test Job to verify if alignment is necessary.
5. If alignment is necessary, press Start.

6. Place a stack of paper in the output bin (callout 1) of the inner finisher. Align the stack against the rear
jogger (callout 2). Measure the distance in millimeters (callout 4) between the paper and the front jogger
(callout 3). Enter that measurement in the Distance field.
Figure 2-113 Adjust joggers

Top view
+ -
1
2
View from output destination 4
2 1 1 3
7. The amount of adjustment that was applied is shown in the Adjustment field. Select Finish.
8. Select Print Test Job to verify the pages are aligned correctly. If they are not, repeat the above steps.
Adjust the inner finisher return belt tension

The inner finisher return belt aligns paper in the output stack with the right wall of the output bin. Follow these
procedures to adjust the tension of this belt.

2. Select Return Belt Tension.
3. Select Print Test Job to print a 10-page job.
4. If the pages are too far from the output bin wall, select the plus button to increase the tension on the belt.
If the pages buckle, select the minus button to decrease the tension.
5. Select Print Test Job to verify the pages are aligned correctly. If they are not, repeat the above steps.
Adjust the inner finisher stapler alignment

Follow this procedure to adjust the location of the staple on printed pages.
2. Select Stapler Alignment.
3. Select Staple Location.
Choose from:
● Top left
● Top right
● Two left
● Manual stapler
4. Select Print Test Job to print a 2-page staple job with the requested staple location.

5. For top left (callout 1) or top right (callout 2) staple positions, if the staple is too far from the edge of the
page, select the plus button to move the staple closer to the edge. If the staple is too close the edge of the
page, select the minus button to move the staple further from the edge.
Figure 2-114 Adjust staple position top left or top right

Rear
+
-
2
Delivery direction
1
+
Front -
6. For two left staple positions (callout 1), if the staples are too close together, select the plus button to move
them farther apart. If the staples are too far apart, select the minus button to move them closer together.
Figure 2-115 Adjust staple position two left

Rear
+
1
Delivery direction
-
Front
7. Select Print Test Job to print a 2-page staple job with the requested staple location. Verify that the staple
location is correct.

8. For the manual stapler, insert a face-down stack of paper into the stapler until it staples. If the staple
(callout 1) is too far from the edge of the page, select the plus button to move the staple closer to the
edge. If the staple is too close the edge of the page, select the minus button to move the staple further
from the edge.
Figure 2-116 Adjust manual stapler position
Rear
+
-
1
Front

Clear paper jams
Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.
● Paper path jam sensor locations
● Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
● Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
● Clear paper jams in the document feeder - 31.13.yz (M776)
● Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)
● Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2)
● Clear jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF)
● Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1)
● Clear jams in the duplex area (13.D3)
● Clear paper jams in the 550-sheet paper tray (13.A3, 13.A4)
● Clear paper jams in the 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand (13.A4, 13.A5)
● Clear paper jams in the 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5, 13.A7)
● Change jam recovery from the control panel
Paper path jam sensor locations

Use the figures below to identify the locations of sensors where reoccurring jams are found.
Figure 2-117 Printer jam sensors (M751/E75245)
SR41
SR7
SR26
SR16
SR9
SR12
SR25
SR8
ENWW Clear paper jams 333

Table 2-76 Printer jam sensors (M751/E75245)
Sensor Description Sensor Description
SR7 Fuser output sensor SR16 Fuser loop sensor 1
SR8 Registration sensor SR25 Registration media width sensor 3
SR9 Registration media width sensor 1 SR26 Fuser loop sensor 2
SR12 Registration media width sensor 2 SR41 FD1 media full sensor
Figure 2-118 Printer jam sensors (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)

SR19
SR22
PAPOUT3
PAPOUT2
SR7
SR16
SR26
SR9
SR12
SR25
SR8
Table 2-77 Printer jam sensors (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z)

SR7 Fuser output sensor SR19 FD1 media full sensor
SR8 Registration sensor SR22 Duplex feed sensor
SR9 Registration media width sensor SR26 Fuser loop sensor 2

1

Table 2-77 Printer jam sensors (M856/E85055/M776dn/M776z) (continued)
SR12 Registration media width sensor PAPOUT2 Fuser output sensor 2

2
SR16 Fuser loop sensor 1 PAPOUT3 Fuser output sensor 3
Figure 2-119 Printer jam sensors (M776zs)

SR31
SR29
SR32
PAPOUT3
PAPOUT2
SR7
SR16
SR26
SR9
SR12
SR25
SR8
Table 2-78 Printer jam sensors (M776zs)

SR7 Fuser output sensor SR26 Fuser loop sensor 2

Table 2-78 Printer jam sensors (M776zs) (continued)
SR8 Registration sensor SR29 Duplex feed sensor
SR9 Registration media width sensor SR31 FD1 media full sensor
1
SR12 Registration media width sensor SR32 FD2 output sensor

2
SR16 Fuser loop sensor 1 PAPOUT2 Fuser output sensor 2
SR25 Registration media width sensor PAPOUT3 Fuser output sensor 3

3
Figure 2-120 550-sheet paper tray jam sensors

SR24
Table 2-79 550-sheet paper tray jam sensors
Sensor Description
SR24 550-sheet feeder paper feed sensor

Figure 2-121 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand jam sensors
SR15
SR18
Table 2-80 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand jam sensors
Sensor Description
SR15 2x550-sheet feeder upper tray paper feed sensor
SR18 2x550-sheet feeder lower tray paper feed sensor
Figure 2-122 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand jam sensors
SR38
SR36
SR33

Table 2-81 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand jam sensors
Sensor Description
SR33 HCI right tray feed sensor
SR36 HCI left tray feed sensor
SR38 HCI feed sensor
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams

The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control panel.
When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps
in the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?

To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
NOTE: To see a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper jams,
click here.
1. Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this printer.
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
4. Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the
stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they
are touching the paper stack without bending it.
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets
one at a time.
8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is configured correctly for the paper
type and size.
9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specifications.
Clear paper jams in the document feeder - 31.13.yz (M776)

The following information describes how to clear paper jams in the document feeder. When a jam occurs, the
control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

1. Open the document-feeder cover.
2. Remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the document-feeder cover.
NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document-feeder input tray are adjusted against the
document, without bending the document. To copy narrow documents, use the flatbed scanner. Remove all
staples and paper clips from original documents.

NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than originals that
are printed on plain paper.
Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 1 and inside the right
door.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
● 13.A1.XX Jam in Tray 1
1. If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam

by gently pulling the paper straight out.
2. If you cannot remove the paper, or if no jammed

paper is visible in Tray 1, close Tray 1 and open the
right door.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller.
Contaminants can affect print quality.

3. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
4. Gently pull out any jammed paper in the duplex

area on the right door.
5. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser,

gently pull downward to remove it.

6. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it
would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
squeeze the release levers, lift up slightly, and
then pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is

in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
7. Open the jam-access door on the fuser. If paper is

jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up
to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.

8. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,

gently pull the paper out to remove it.

9. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
10. Close the jam-access door on the fuser, and push

the fuser completely into the printer until it clicks
into place.
11. Close the right door.
Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 and inside the right
door.
● 13.A2.XX Jam in tray 2

1. Open the tray and remove any jammed or
damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is
not overfilled and that the paper guides are
adjusted correctly.
2. Pull the tray completely out of the printer by

pulling and lifting it up slightly.
3. Gently remove any paper from the feed rollers

inside the printer. First pull the paper to the left to
release it, and then pull it forward to remove it.

4. Install and close the tray.
5. Open the right door.






fragments.
CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser has cooled,

the rollers that are inside could still be hot. Do not
touch the fuser rollers.



into place.
Clear jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door.
● 13.B9.XX Jam in fuser
● 13.B2.XX Jam in <Cover or Door>.
● 13.FF.EE Door Open Jam
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.



NOTE: Remove and reinstall the fuser to clear the
jam condition on the fuser sensors.



fragments.




into place.
Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1)

Use the following procedure to clear jams in the output bin.
● 13.E1.XX Jam at standard output bin


Clear jams in the duplex area (13.D3)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door.
● 13.D3.XX Jam in duplex area






fragments.




into place.
Clear paper jams in the 550-sheet paper tray (13.A3, 13.A4)

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550-sheet paper tray
and inside the right door.

adjusted correctly.
2. Release two tabs at the back of the tray, and then

pull the tray completely out of the printer.
3. Remove any paper from the feed rollers inside the

printer. First pull the paper to the left to release it,
and then pull it forward to remove it.

4. Install and close the tray.
5. Open the lower-right door.

7. Close the lower-right door.






fragments.




into place.
Clear paper jams in the 2x550-sheet paper tray and stand (13.A4, 13.A5)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 2x550-sheet paper
tray and stand and inside the right door.

adjusted correctly.
2. Release two tabs at the back of the tray, and then

pull the tray completely out of the printer.
3. Remove the jammed paper from the feed rollers

inside the printer. First pull the paper to the left,

6. Close the lower-right door, and then install and

close the tray.






fragments.




into place.
Clear paper jams in the 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray and stand (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5,
13.A7)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 2,700-sheet HCI paper
tray and stand and inside the right door.

1. Release the tray latch on the left HCI tray. Slide the
tray away from the printer until it stops, and then
lift it up and away from the printer to remove it.
2. Remove any jammed paper from the feed rollers

3. Install and close the left HCI tray.

4. Release the tray latch on the right HCI tray. Slide
the tray away from the printer until it stops, and
then lift it up and away from the printer to remove
it.
5. Remove any jammed paper from the feed rollers


7. Remove any damaged sheets.
8. Close the lower-right door, and then install and

close the right HCI tray.







fragments.




into place.
Change jam recovery from the control panel

Use the following procedure to change jam recovery from the control panel.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.

3. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Jam Recovery, and then press the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to scroll to an option, and then press the OK button to select it.
● Auto — The printer attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is
the default setting.
● Off — The printer does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store
the most recent pages, performance is optimal.
NOTE: Some pages can be lost if the printer runs out of paper while printing a duplex job with Jam
Recovery set to Off.
● On — The printer always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few
pages printed.

Solve performance problems
Review the following information and procedures to solve performance problems.
● Factors affecting print performance
● Print speeds
● The printer does not print
● The printer prints slowly
NOTE: Tray 1 and Tray 2 are optimal for paper pickup when using special paper or media other than 20lb plain
paper. For Tray 1 and Tray 2 the printer increases the number of attempts to pick up a page, which increases the
reliability of successfully picking the page from the tray and decreases the possibility of a mis-pick jam.
HP recommends using Tray 1 or Tray 2 if the printer is experiencing excessive or reoccurring jams from trays
other than Tray 1 and Tray 2, or for print jobs that require media other than 20lb plain paper.
Factors affecting print performance

Review the following information about factors affecting print performance.
Table 2-82 Solve performance problems

Problem Cause Solution
Pages print but are totally blank. The document might contain blank pages. Check the original document to see if
content is present on all of the pages.
Pages print but are totally blank. The printer might be malfunctioning. To check the printer, print a Configuration
page.
Pages print but are totally blank. Make sure that the printer is not feeding Make sure that the paper meets HP
multiple pages (especially if very thin paper specifications for this printer.
is used).
For a complete list of specific HP-brand
paper that this printer supports, go to
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM751 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE75245
or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM856
or http://www.hp.com/support/
colorljE85055 or http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
Pages print very slowly. Heavier paper types can slow the print job. Print on a different type of paper.
NOTE: Some software programs process

print jobs slowly.
Pages print very slowly. Complex pages can print slowly. Proper fusing might require a slower print
speed to ensure the best print quality.
NOTE: Some software programs process
print jobs slowly.
Pages print very slowly. Large batches, narrow paper, and special Print in smaller batches, on a different type
paper such as gloss, transparency, of paper, or on a different size of paper.
NOTE: Some software programs process cardstock, and HP Tough Paper can slow the
print jobs slowly. print job.
Pages did not print. The printer might not be pulling paper Make sure paper is loaded in the tray
correctly. correctly.

Table 2-82 Solve performance problems (continued)
Problem Cause Solution
Pages did not print. The paper is jamming in the printer. Clear the jam.
Pages did not print. The USB cable might be defective or ● Disconnect the USB cable at both ends
incorrectly connected. and reconnect it.
● Try printing a job that has printed in

the past.
● Try using a different USB cable.
Pages did not print. Other devices are running on the host The printer might not share a USB port. If an
computer. external hard drive or network switchbox is
connected to the same port as the printer,
the other device might be interfering with
the printer. To connect and use the printer,
disconnect the other device or use two USB
ports on the host computer.
Pages did not print. The print job might not have arrived at the Check the printer status queue. Also, the
printer. Printing message should appear on the
control panel display.
Print speeds
Print speed is the number of pages that print in one minute. Print speed depends on different engine-process
speeds or operational pauses between printed pages during normal printer operation. Factors that determine
the print speed of the printer include the following:
● Page formatting time
The printer must pause for each page to be formatted before it prints. Complex pages take more time to
format, resulting in reduced print speed. However, most jobs print at full engine speed.
● Media size
Legal-size media reduces print speed because it is longer than the standard Letter- or A4–size media. A
reduce print speed is used when printing on narrow media to prevent the edges of the fuser from
overheating.
● Media mode
Some media types require a reduced print speed to achieve maximum print quality on that media. For
example, glossy, heavy, and specialty media (for example, envelopes or photos) require a reduced print
speed. To maximize the print speed for special media types, make sure that the correct media type in the
print driver is selected.
● Printer temperature
To prevent printer damage, print speed is reduced if the printer reaches a specific internal temperature
(thermal slow down). The starting temperature of the printer, ambient environment temperature, and the
print job size effect the number of pages that can be printed before the printer reduces the print speed.
Thermal slow down reduces print speed by printing four pages and then pausing for an amount of time
before printing continues.
● Other print speed reduction factors
ENWW Solve performance problems 377

Other factors (especially during large print jobs) that can cause reduced print speeds include:
– Density control sequence; occurs every 150 pages and takes about 120 seconds
The printer does not print

If the printer does not print at all, try the following solutions.
1. Make sure the printer is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready.
● If the control panel does not indicate the printer is ready, turn the printer off and then on again.
● If the control panel indicates the printer is ready, try sending the job again.
2. If the control panel indicates the printer has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the job again.
3. Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the printer is connected to a network, check the
following items:
● Check the bottom LED next to the network connection on the printer. If the network is active, the light
is green.
● Make sure that a network cable and not a phone cord is used to connect to the network.
● Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.
4. Install the HP software for the printer. Using generic printer drivers can cause delays clearing jobs from the
print queue.
5. From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and open
the Ports tab.
● If a network cable is used to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed on the Ports
tab matches the one on the printer configuration page.
● If a USB cable is used, and the printer is connected to a wireless network, make sure the box is
checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.
6. If a personal firewall system on the computer is used, it might be blocking communication with the printer.
Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.
7. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference
might be delaying print jobs.
The printer prints slowly

If the printer prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.
1. Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this printer. For a list of specifications, go to
this Web site: http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM751 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE75245 or
http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM856 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE85055 or
2. When the printer is configured to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the printer prints more
slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not correct for the type of
paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.
3. If the host computer or the printer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference
might be delaying print jobs.

Solve connectivity problems
Review the following information and procedures to solve connectivity problems.
● Solve USB connection problems
● Solve wired network problems
Solve USB connection problems

If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.
● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.
● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 m (6.65 ft). Try using a shorter cable.
● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if
necessary.
ENWW Solve connectivity problems 379

Solve wired network problems
Review the following information and procedures to solve wired network problems.
● Introduction
● Poor physical connection
● The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer
● The computer is unable to communicate with the printer
● The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
● New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
● The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
● The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
Introduction
Check the following items to verify that the printer is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a
configuration page from the printer control panel and locate the printer IP address that is listed on this page.
Poor physical connection

Use the following procedure when the printer has a poor physical connection.
1. Verify that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.
2. Verify that cable connections are secure.
3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and verify that the amber activity light and
the green link-status light are lit.
4. If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer

Use the following procedure when the computer is using the incorrect IP address for the printer.
1. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the printer is
selected. The printer IP address is listed on the printer configuration page.
2. If you installed the printer using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to this
printer, even if its IP address changes.
3. If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP
address.
4. If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer

Use the following procedure when the computer is unable to communicate with the printer.
1. Test network communication by pinging the network.

a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
● For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
● For OS X, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings,
the printer, and the computer are all configured for the same network.
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings,
you must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

Use the following procedure when the computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly.
1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.
2. Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

Use the following procedure when the printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect.
1. Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.
2. Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.
ENWW Solve connectivity problems 381

Service mode functions
Review the following information about service mode functions.
● Open the service menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Open the service menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Service menu items
● Printer resets
● Format Disk and Partial Clean functions
Open the service menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)

Use the following procedure to open the service menu from an LCD control panel.
then select OK.
2. Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK.
3. Navigate to Service, and then select OK.
● M751, E75245: 04075119
Open the service menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)

Use the following procedure to open the service menu from a touchscreen control panel.
2. Open the Service menu:
● M856, E85055: 10085619
● M776: 10077619
Service menu items

The following menu items appear in the Service menu.
Table 2-83 Service menu

First level Second level Value Description
Event Log Print Print or view the event log.

Table 2-83 Service menu (continued)
Cycle Counts Total Engine Cycles Set the page count that was
stored in NVRAM prior to
installing a new formatter.
Cycle Counts Mono Cycle Count Set the mono page printed
count.
Cycle Counts Color Cycle Count Set the color page printed count.
Scanner Settings Item to Adjust Glass: Left edge Set the adjustment values.
Glass: Rear edge WARNING! Do not change

these values unless instructed
ADF: Leading front edge to do so.
ADF: Leading back edge
ADF: Trailing front edge
ADF: Trailing back edge
ADF: Left side front
ADF: Left side back
ADF: Feed direction

magnification
Serial number Set the serial number.
Service ID Use this item to show the date

that the printer was first used on
the control panel. This
eliminates the need for users to
keep paper receipts for proof of
warranty.
Cold Reset Paper When you perform a cold reset,

the paper size that is stored in
NVRAM is reset to the default
factory setting. If you replace a
formatter board in a country/
region that uses A4 as the
standard paper size, use this
menu to reset the default paper
size to A4. LETTER and A4 are
the only available values.
MPS Settings Low Alerts On
Off
MPS Settings Reset Supplies Level Reset to Level 1
Reset to Level 2
Reset to Level 3
Reset to Non-HP Managed Mode
ENWW Service mode functions 383

Finisher Calibration Jogger Alignment Letter (8.5x11) Check or calibrate the output
stack joggers.
NOTE: M776zs model only. A4 (10x297 mm)
Follow the instructions on the
screen to test and modify the
output stack alignment.
Finisher Calibration Stapler Alignment Staple Location Adjust the position of the staple
on a stapled job.
NOTE: M776zs model only. Top left
Top right screen to test and modify the
staple position.
Two left
Manual stapler
Finisher Calibration Return Belt Tension Adjust the tension of the return
belt on the inner finisher.
NOTE: M776zs model only.
screen to test and modify the
return belt tension.
PTT Test Mode Test the internal modem for the

analog fax accessory.
NOTE: Fax models only.
PTT Test Mode Hook Operations Off Hook
NOTE: Fax models only. On Hook
PTT Test Mode Generate Random Data Select a value from the list.
PTT Test Mode Generate DTMF Tone Burst Select a value from the list.
PTT Test Mode Generate DTMF Continuous Tone Select a value from the list.
PTT Test Mode Generate Pulse Burst Select a value from the list.
PTT Test Mode Generate Tone Dial Number Enter dial number.
PTT Test Mode Generate Pulse Dial Number Enter dial number.
PTT Test Mode Generate Single Modem Tone Range: 1100–2100 Hz
NOTE: Fax models only. Default = 2100 Hz
PTT Test Mode Line Measurements

PTT Test Mode Fax Transmit Signal Loss
Reset Supplies Registration Roller After replacing a supply kit,

choose it from the list and select
Duplex Roller Reset.
Multipurpose Tray Roller Kit
Tray 2 Roller Kit
Test Support Continuous Scan 2 Sided
Save to Disk
Test Support Continuous Copy 2 Sided
Save to Disk
Test Support Continuous print from USB
Test Support Automatic Calibrations On*
Off
Test Support Raw Scan 2-sided
Mechanical Calibration
Test Support Runtime Configuration (M751/ Do not change

E75245)
E75245MSKU
E75245MSKU_EIC
M751 Duplex
M751 Duplex_EIC
M751 No Duplex
M751 No Duplex_EIC
Standard
Test Support Runtime Configuration (M856/ Do not change

E85055)
E85055MSKU
E85055MSKU_EIC
M856
M856EIC
Standard

Test Support Runtime Configuration (M776) Do not change
M776
M776EIC
M776flow
M776flowEIC
Standard
Workflow
Fax V.29 Speed V.29 9600 Select the desired fax speed.
NOTE: Fax models only. V.29 7200

Printer resets
Review the following information and procedures about printer resets.
● Restore factory-set defaults from the control panel
● Restore the service ID
● Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
● Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Restore factory-set defaults from the control panel

Use the following procedure to restore factory-set defaults from the control panel.
select OK.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to General, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Reset Factory Settings, and then press the OK button to select it.
4. A verification message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data. Touch the
Reset button to complete the process.

Restore the service ID
Use the following procedure to restore the service ID.
● Restore the service ID
● Convert the service ID to an actual date
Restore the service ID
When replacing the formatter, the service ID is lost. Use the Service ID menu item in the Service menu to reset
the service ID to reflect the original date that the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the
following formula to calculate the dates:
1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the printer was first used in 2002,
calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12.
2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.
● Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 or add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.
Convert the service ID to an actual date
Use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty. Use the following
formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows:
1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed.
2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.
3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.
Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:
1. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
2. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Because there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10, which
represents October.
3. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date.
The complete date is 17-October-2002.
NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1 2
2. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.
Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to perform a cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from an LCD control panel.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then press the OK button.
4. Use the down arrow button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then press the OK button to select it.
NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version of the
printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support these options.

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu and
continues the normal boot process.
If a selection is not made in the initial menu within 30 seconds,

the printer returns to a normal boot (the same as selecting
Continue).
If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout does not

apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is required to

open the Pre-boot menu.
Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.
If authentication is required (and the user is not already signed

in) the Sign In prompt displays. The user is required to sign in.
Administrator Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download process. A
USB Thumbdrive option will work on all FutureSmart printers.
USB USB or Network connections are not currently supported.
USB Thumbdrive
Administrator Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk partitions.
CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item removes all data.
A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.
The system is not bootable after this action and a 99.09.67

error displays on the control panel. A firmware download must
be performed to return the system to a bootable state.
Administrator Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data except the
firmware repository where the master firmware bundle is
downloaded and saved).
CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item removes all data

except the firmware repository. A delete confirmation prompt
is not provided.
CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations

and settings to factory defaults (customer configurations and
settings are lost).
This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing the

firmware image from the active directory without having to
download new firmware code (printer remains bootable).
Administrator Change Password Select this item to set or change the administrator password.
Administrator Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a password from
the Administrator menu. Before the password is actually
cleared, a message will be shown asking to confirm that the
password should be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm
the action.
When the confirmation prompt displays, press the OK button

to clear the password.

Administrator Manage Disk Clear Disk Select the Clear Disk item to enable using an external device
for job storage. Job storage is normally enabled only for the
(continued) Boot device. This will be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error
is displayed.

Administrator Manage Disk Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new secure disk to
this printer.
The secure disk already locked to this printer will remain

accessible to this printer. Use this function to have more than
one encrypted disk accessible by the printer when using them
interchangeably.
The data stored on the secure disk locked to this printer always
remains accessible to this printer.
Administrator Manage Disk Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure disk in an
unlocked mode for a single service event. The secure disk that
is already locked to this printer will remain accessible to this
printer and uses the old disk's encryption password with the
new disk.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer remains

accessible to this printer.
Administrator Manage Disk Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the non-
secure disk and clear the password associated with the yet-to-
be installed secure disk.
CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.
Administrator Manage Disk Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-secure disk for
this session only, and then search for the missing secure disk
in future sessions.
Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the disk
and unlock it if required.
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command is a one-pass
overwrite, which erases the entire disk including firmware. The
disk remains an encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all
data on the disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk Boot Device Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal device or
get a status about the internal device.
(continued) (continued)

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire
disk, including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of
the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow the user to gain
reinstalled. The HP High Performance Secure Hard Disk is
erased.
Administrator Manage Disk Internal Device Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.
Administrator Manage Disk External Device Select the External Device item to erase the external device or
get status about the external device.
Administrator Manage Disk External Device Secure Erase Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data on the
reinstalled.
The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire disk,

including firmware. The disk remains an encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk External Device Erase/Unlock Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically erase all of
the data on disk and unlock the disk to allow a user to gain
reinstalled. The encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes
a non-encrypted disk.
Administrator Manage Disk External Device Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is available.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [DHCP] The network can be configured to obtain the network
settings from a DHCP server or as static.
(continued) NOTE: This
configuration is only Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition from the
active when the Pre- DHCP server.
boot menu is open.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] Use this item to manually assign the network addresses.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] Default Gateway Use this item to manually enter the default gateway.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.
Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode [STATIC] Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.
NOTE: This
boot menu is open.

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options that can
be set for the next time the printer is turned on and
(continued) initializes to the Ready state.
Administrator Startup Options Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision item to
allow the printer to initialize and show the firmware version
when the printer reaches the Ready state.
Once the printer power is turned on the next time, the Show
Revision item is unchecked so that the firmware revision is
not shown.
Administrator Startup Options Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address and all
customer settings. (This item also returns all settings to
factory defaults.)
NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.
Administrator Startup Options Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed third-
party applications.
Administrator Startup Options Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer calibration for the
very next power-initialization cycle only.

Administrator Startup Options Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock the Service
menu access (both in the Pre-Boot menu and the Device
Maintenance menu).
Service personnel must have the administrator remove the

Lock Service setting before they can open the Service menu.
Administrator Startup Options Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/ScanVolume
during startup.
Administrator Startup Options First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the printer to
initialize as if it is the first time it has been turned on.
For example, the user is prompted to configure first-time

settings like date/time, language, and other settings.
Select this item so that it is enabled for the next time the
printer power is turned on.
When the printer power is turned on the next time, this item
is unchecked so that the pre-configured settings are used
during configuration, and the first-time setting prompt is not
used.
Administrator Startup Options Embedded Jetdirect Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable the
Off embedded HP Jetdirect.
By default this item is unchecked so that HP Jetdirect is

always enabled.
Administrator Startup Options WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the wireless
accessory.

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are useful to diagnose hardware

components and their interface connections. Use these
(continued) items to troubleshoot specific hardware components, and
the interface between them and other components.
Administrator Diagnostics Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Memory diagnostic
Administrator Diagnostics Short Use the Short item to select a brief memory test.
NOTE: This test requires about four minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Long Use the Long item to select an extended memory test.
NOTE: This test requires about twenty minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run item to exclude the Disk diagnostic
Administrator Diagnostics Short Use the Short item to select a brief firmware self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about two or three minutes to

execute.

Administrator Diagnostics Long Use the Long item to select an extended firmware self-test.
NOTE: This test requires about sixty minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Optimized Use the Optimized item to select a test that checks the
active sectors on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about thirty minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Raw Use the Raw item to select a test that checks every sector
on the disk.
NOTE: This test requires about fifty minutes to execute.
Administrator Diagnostics Smart Use the Smart item to select a very brief test that checks the
drive self-monitoring analysis and reporting technology
(SMART) status—the drive detects and reports reliability
indicators to help anticipate disk failures (SMART status).
Administrator Diagnostics CPB Use the CPB item to verify the integrity of the copy
processor board (CPB) and the formatter PCA connections.
Administrator Diagnostics Interconnect Use the Interconnect item to verify the integrity of the
interconnect PCA (ICB) and its connections.
Administrator Diagnostics Run Selected Select the Run Selected item to execute a selected test.
NOTE: If more than one test is selected, they are executed

in sequence.

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to access to
the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to navigate the menu
(continued) selections from a remote location.
IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be initiated by

a person that is physically present at the printer.
This person will also need to provide a randomly generated PIN

to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the Remote Admin

function, see "Remote Admin in the Troubleshooting Manual.
Administrator Remote Admin Stop Telnet
Administrator Remote Admin Refresh IP
Administrator System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the diagnostic
log feature found in the Troubleshooting menu is not accessible,
then use the System Triage item to copy the diagnostic logs to a
USB flash drive at the next printer start up.
The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the problem.
Administrator Change Svc PWD Use this item to change the Service menu personal identification
number (PIN).

Administrator Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number (PIN) has
been changed. Use this item to reset it to the original PIN.
Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator password.
Service Tools Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these values.
Developer Tools Netexec

Format Disk and Partial Clean functions
Review the following information about the Format Disk and Partial Clean functions.
● Active and repository firmware locations
● Partial Clean
● Format Disk
NOTE: Only for printers with an optional hard-disk drive (HDD) installed).
Active and repository firmware locations

The firmware bundle consists of multiple parts. The main components are the Windows CE Operating System
and the printer/peripheral firmware files.
There are two locations/partitions on the hard drive where the firmware components are stored:
● The Active, where the operating system and firmware currently are executing.
● The Repository, the recovery location.
If the Active location is damaged, or a Partial Clean was performed, the printer automatically copies over the OS
and firmware files from the Repository location and the printer recovers.
If both the Active and Repository locations are damaged, or a Format Disk was performed, then both locations
are gone and the error message 99.09.67 displays on the control-panel display. The user must upload the
firmware to the printer in order for it to function again.
CAUTION: The Format Disk option performs a disk initialization for the entire disk. The operating system,
firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be completely lost. HP does not recommend this
action.

Partial Clean
The Partial Clean option erases all partitions and data on the disk drive, except for the firmware repository where
a backup copy of the firmware file is stored. This allows the disk drive to be reformatted without having to
download a firmware upgrade file to return the printer to a bootable state.
● Execute a Partial Clean from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Characteristics of a Partial Clean
● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted.
● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any
customer-defined settings.
● For previous HP printers, a Hard Disk Initialization is similar to executing the Partial Clean function for this
printer.
CAUTION: HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Partial Clean to retain
customer-defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing Partial Clean
● The printer continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Partial Clean.
● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.
● Executing the Partial Clean function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.
● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
● The printer default settings are not properly working.
Execute a Partial Clean from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to execute a Partial Clean from an LCD control panel.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight Partial Clean and then press the OK button.
4. Press the OK button again.
5. Press the Home button to highlight Continue, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: The printer initializes.
Execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to execute a Partial Clean from a touchscreen control panel.

1 2
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight Partial Clean and then press the OK button.
5. Press the Home button to highlight Continue, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: The printer initializes.

Format Disk
The Format Disk option erases the entire disk drive.
● Execute a Format Disk from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● Execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
CAUTION: After executing a Format Disk option, the printer is not bootable.
Characteristics of a Format Disk
● Customer-defined settings, third-party solutions, firmware files, and the operating system are deleted.
NOTE: Rebooting the printer does not restore the firmware files.
● Rebooting the printer restores the firmware files from the Repository location, but does not restore any
customer-defined settings.
● After executing the Format Disk function, the message 99.09.67 displays on the control panel.
● After executing the Format Disk function, the printer firmware must be reloaded.
CAUTION: HP recommends not using the Format Disk option unless an error occurs and the solution in the
printer service manual recommends this solution. After executing the Format Disk function, the printer is
unusable.
HP recommends backing-up printer configuration data before executing a Format Disk to retain customer-
defined settings (if needed). See the Backup/Restore item in the Device Maintenance menu.
Reasons for performing Format Disk
● The printer continually boots up in an error state.
NOTE: Try clearing the error prior to executing a Format Disk.
● The printer will not respond to commands from the control panel.
● Executing the Format Disk function is helpful for troubleshooting hard disk problems.
● To reset the printer by deleting all solutions and customer-defined settings.
Execute a Format Disk from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to execute a Format Disk from an LCD control panel.
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight Format Disk, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.

Execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to execute a Format Disk from a touchscreen control panel.
1 2
3. Use the down arrow button to highlight Format Disk, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: When the Format Disk operation is complete, reload the printer firmware.

Firmware upgrades
Learn where to go to download the most recent firmware upgrade for the printer.
● Determine the installed revision of firmware
● Perform a firmware upgrade
● In the US, go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM751 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE75245 or

http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM856 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE85055 or
a. Select Get drivers, Software, and Firmware, and then select the appropriate product by name.
NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so that
the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.
b. Select the driver language and operating system.
c. Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.
● Outside the U.S., go to www.hp.com/support.
a. Select your country/region.
b. Select Drivers & Downloads.
c. Enter the product name in the Find my product dialogue box, and then select Go.
TIP: Click on the How do I find my product name/number? link to see a short video on identifying the
printer name and number.
d. Select the appropriate product by name.
NOTE: More than one printer model might be listed. Make sure to select the correct model so that
the upgraded firmware supports all of the printer functions.
e. Select the driver language and operating system.
f. Locate the firmware download, and then select Download.

Determine the installed revision of firmware
Use the following procedure to determine the installed revision of firmware.
● Print the configuration page from the control panel
NOTE: Print a configuration page to determine the installed revision of firmware.
Print the configuration page from the control panel

Use the following procedure to print the configuration page from a LCD control panel on an M506/M507 printer.
2. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Configuration/Status Pages, and then press the OK button.
3. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Configuration Page, and then press the OK button.
. Select OK to print the page.
Figure 2-126 Configuration page firmware version
ENWW Firmware upgrades 403

Perform a firmware upgrade
The firmware bundle is a .bdl file. This file requires an interactive upgrade method. The traditional FTP, LPR, or
Port 9100 methods of upgrading are not available.
● HP Embedded Web Server
● USB flash drive (Pre-boot menu)
● USB flash drive (control panel menu)
Use one of the following methods to upgrade the firmware for this printer.
HP Embedded Web Server

Use the following procedure to perform a firmware upgrade using the HP Embedded Web Server.
NOTE: The printer should be at the Ready state.
The firmware update might take 10 minutes or longer based on the input/output (I/O) transfer rates and the time
it takes for the printer to reinitialize.
1. Open an Internet browser window.
2. Enter the printer IP address in the URL line.
3. Select the Firmware Upgrade link from the General tab or from the Troubleshooting tab.
4. Browse to the location that the firmware upgrade file was downloaded to, and then select the firmware file
—the file has a .bdl file extension. Select the Install button to perform the upgrade.
NOTE: Do not close the browser window OR interrupt communication until the HP Embedded Web Server
(EWS) displays the confirmation page.
5. After the printer reinitializes, print a configuration page and verify that the latest firmware version has been
installed.

USB flash drive (Pre-boot menu)
Use the following procedures to perform a firmware upgrade using a USB flash drive and the Pre-boot menu.
● USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
IMPORTANT: Only use this method of performing a firmware upgrade if the printer cannot initialize to the
Ready state.
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from an LCD control
panel.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight +3 Administrator, and then press the OK button.
3. If necessary, press the down arrow button to highlight +1 Download, and then press the OK button.
4. Insert the USB flash drive with the .bdl file on it into the USB port on the printer.
NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control panel display, try
using a different portable storage device.
5. Press the down arrow button to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then press the OK button.
6. Press the down arrow button to highlight the .bdl file, and then press the OK button.
NOTE: The upgrade process can take 10 minutes or longer to complete.
TIP: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for this
printer.
7. When the message Complete displays on the control panel display, turn the printer power off, and then on
again.
8. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware
version was installed.
USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to perform a USB flash drive firmware (Pre-boot menu) update from a touchscreen
control panel.
1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.

2. Touch the middle of the control panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.
1 2
3. Touch the down arrow button to highlight +3 Administrator, and then touch the OK button.
4. If necessary, touch the down arrow button to highlight +1 Download, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE: If the error message No USB Thumbdrive Files Found displays on the control panel display, try
using a different portable storage device.
6. Touch the down arrow button to highlight USB Thumbdrive, and then touch the OK button.
7. Touch the down arrow button to highlight the .bdl file, and then touch the OK button.
printer.
8. When the message Complete displays on the control panel display, touch the down arrow button several
times until the message Continue displays.
9. Touch the OK button to begin the upgrade. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the
Ready state.
10. When the upgrade process is complete, print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware
version was installed.

USB flash drive (control panel menu)
Use the following procedures to perform a firmware upgrade using a USB flash drive and the control panel
menu.
● USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
● USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/
M776)
NOTE: USB flash drives that are not using a FAT32 format, or do not have a CD formatted partition, might not
be recognized by the printer. If the printer does not recognize a USB flash drive, try using a different USB flash
drive.
TIP: The USB port on the printer must be enabled. If it is disabled, use the Enable Retrieve from USB item in the
General Settings menu to enable it.
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)
Use the following procedure to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from an LCD
control panel.
then select OK.
2. Navigate to Maintenance, and then select OK.
3. Navigate to USB Firmware Upgrade, and then select OK.
5. If necessary, use the down arrow button to scroll to the appropriate .bdl file, and then press the OK
button to select.
NOTE: If there is more than one .bdl file on the storage device, make sure to select the correct file for this
printer.
6. Use the down arrow button to scroll to Install, and then press the OK button to start the firmware
upgrade.
NOTE: Print a configuration page and verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed.
USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from a touchscreen control panel (M856/E85055/M776)
Use the following procedure to perform a USB flash drive firmware (control panel menu) update from a
touchscreen control panel.
1. Copy the .bdl file to a portable USB flash drive.
2. Turn the printer on, and then wait until it reaches the Ready state.
4. Open the Maintenance menu.
5. Touch the USB Firmware Upgrade button.

7. Touch the .bdl file, and then touch the Upgrade button.
printer.
8. Select one of the following options:
● Upgrade
● Re-install
● Downgrade
9. When the upgrade is complete, the printer will initialize to the Ready state. Print a configuration page and
verify that the upgrade firmware version was installed.
Solve fax or email problems

Fax or email troubleshooting information is not provided in this service manual. The most current information is
available in WISE or HP Channel Services Network (CSN). Search using model number then use "fax
troubleshooting" as the search term.
Americas (AMS)
● WISE - English
● WISE - Spanish
● WISE - French
● WISE - English
● WISE - Japanese
● WISE - Korean
● WISE - Thai
● WISE - English

A Printer specifications
Review the following specifications for the printers.
● Printer dimensions
● Printer space requirements
● Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
● Operating-environment range
● Certificate of Volatility
Printer dimensions
Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.
Table A-1 Dimensions for the printer
Dimension Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
Height 398.5 mm (15.7 in) 442.5 mm (17.4 in)
Depth 589 mm (23.2 in) 992 mm (39 in)
Width 556 mm (21.9 in) 1,051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight 45.1 kg (99.4. lb) 45.1 kg (99.4. lb)
Table A-2 Dimensions for the 550-sheet paper tray
Dimension Value
Height 150 mm (5.9 in)
Depth Tray closed: 584 mm (23 in)
Tray opened: 999 mm (39.3 in)
Width Door closed: 556 mm (21.9 in)
Door opened: 640 mm (25.2 in)
Weight 10.2 kg (22.5 lb)
ENWW 409
Table A-3 Dimensions for the printer with one 550-sheet paper tray
Dimension Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
Height 524.5 mm (20.6 in) 568.5 mm (22.4 in)
Depth 589 mm (23.2 in) 1,004 mm (39.5 in)
Width 556 mm (21.9 in) 1,051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight 55.3 kg (121.9 lb) 55.3 kg (121.9 lb)
Table A-4 Dimensions for the 2 x 550-sheet paper tray and stand
Dimension Value
Depth1 Tray closed: 659 mm (25.9 in)
Tray open: 1,074 mm (42.3 in)
Width1 Door closed: 556 mm (21.9 in)
Door open: 771 mm (30.4 in)
Weight1 22.9 kg (50.5lb)

1 Does not include stability feet.
Table A-5 Dimensions for the printer with the 2 x 550-sheet paper tray and stand
Dimension Printer and accessories fully closed Printer and accessories fully opened
Height 722.5 mm (28.4 in) 766.5 mm (30.2 in)
Depth1 659 mm (25.9 in) 1,074 mm (42.3 in)
Width1 556 mm (21.9 in) 1,051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight1 68.0 kg (149.9 lb) 68.0 kg (149.9 lb)

Table A-6 Dimensions for the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper tray and stand
Dimension Value
Depth1 Tray closed: 659 mm (25.9 in)
Tray open: 1,064 mm (41.9 in)
Door open: 771 mm (30.4 in)
Weight1 28.2 kg (62.2 lb)

410 Appendix A Printer specifications ENWW

Table A-7 Dimensions for the printer with the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper tray and stand
Height 722.5 mm (28.4 in) 766.5 mm (30.2 in)
Depth1
659 mm (25.9 in) 1,064 mm (41.9 in)
Width1 556 mm (21.9 in) 1,051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight1 73.3 kg (161.6 lb) 73.3 kg (161.6 lb)

Table A-8 Dimensions for the stand
Dimension Value
Depth1 Door closed: 659 mm (25.9 in)
Door opened: 1,185 mm (46.7 in)
Door opened: 556 mm (21.9 in)
Weight1 15.8 kg (34.9 lb)

Table A-9 Dimensions for the printer with the stand
Height 722.5 mm (28.4 in) 766.5 mm (30.2 in)
Depth1 659 mm (25.9 in) 1,185 mm (46.7 in)
Width1 556 mm (21.9 in) 1,051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight1 61.4 kg (135.4 lb) 61.4 kg (135.4 lb)

Printer space requirements

HP recommends that the following distances be added to the printer dimensions provided in this chapter to
make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper ventilation.
● From the left-side or right-side of the printer to an obstruction, add:
– 430 mm (17 in)
● From the front-side of the printer to an obstruction, add:
– 610 mm (24 in)
● From the back-side of the printer to an obstruction, add:
– 460 mm (18 in)
ENWW Printer space requirements 411

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
Review the following information about power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions.
See for current information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.
Operating-environment range
Review the operating-environment range.
Table A-10 Operating-environment specifications1
Environment Recommended Allowed
Temperature 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F) 15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F)
Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% RH

1 These values are subject to change. For current information, go to http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM751 or http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljE75245 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljM856 or http://www.hp.com/support/colorljE85055 or http://www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
Certificate of Volatility
Review the certificates of volatility for the printers.

Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2; M751/E75245)
HP Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Numbers: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed E75245 T3U64A HP Inc.
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M751 T3U43A 11311 Chinden Blvd.
T3U44A Boise, ID 83714
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
DDR3 DRAM 1.5GB Yes No Operating system and print/scan When the printer is powered OFF,
buffer the memory is erased.
Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
EEPROM (IOD) 64KB Yes No Stores customer setting data for There are no steps to clear this
backup/restore. data.
SPI Flash 4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear this
factory product configuration data data.
required for the device to function.
User modifications are limited to
downloading digitally signed HP
firmware images.
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
eMMC Module 16GB Yes No Operating system and user data Update the firmware.
(Removeable)
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
USB input includes print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, and third-party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded to a USB device. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.
Additional Information:
This product has both a USB device port and two USB host ports. Data on the USB host ports can be accessed from the device port.
Also, an internal mini-B USB port enables an accessory option where a Hardware Integration Pocket (HIP) device can be added. The
HIP option conforms to the HIP protocol and enables both HP and third-party hardware/software. The HIP device does not ship with the
product and is added by the user as an option.
RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:
ENWW Certificate of Volatility 413

Other Transmission Capabilities
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:
Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications
Author Information
Email: Technical.Marketing@hp.com
Date Prepared: 7/19/2019

HP Color LaserJet Managed E85055 T3U64A HP Inc.
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M856 T3U51A 11311 Chinden Blvd.
T3U52A Boise, ID 83714
Volatile Memory
DDR3 DRAM 1.5GB Yes No Operating system and print/scan When the printer is powered OFF,
Non-Volatile Memory
firmware images.
Mass Storage
eMMC Module 16GB Yes No Operating system and user data Update the firmware.
(Removeable)
USB
RF/RFID
Purpose:
Specifications:
Additional information:
A Wi-Fi option is available only on the T3U52A

Purpose:
Specifications:
Other Capabilities
Purpose:
Specifications
Author Information

Figure A-5 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2; M776)
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M776 T3U55A HP Inc.
T3U56A 11311 Chinden Blvd.
3WT91A Boise, ID 83714
Volatile Memory
DDR3 DRAM 2GB Yes No Operating system and print/scan When the printer is powered OFF,
Non-Volatile Memory
firmware images.
Mass Storage
HDD (Removeable) 500GB Yes No Operating system and user data Update the firmware.
USB
RF/RFID
Purpose:
Specifications:
Additional information:
A Wi-Fi option is available only on the T3U56A and 3WT91A models.

Figure A-6 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2; M776)
Purpose:
Specifications:
Other Capabilities
Purpose:
Specifications
Author Information

Index
Symbols/Numerics B presence detection 1, 33, 45, 46

1x550-sheet paper feeder controller backup error toner level detection 1, 33, 45,
PCA 32.WX.YZ error 117 46
connections, diagrams 204, 205 reset error 117 cassette presence detection
2ndary service menu 117 restore error 117 trays 3-5 1
2x550-sheet paper tray basic printer operation 1, 3 caution 1
electrical components 88 bias generation certificate of volatility 409
jam detection 90 high-voltage power supply 1, 25 certificates of volatility 412
paper pickup 88 blank display Channel partners
2x550-sheet tray control panel 156 WISE 1, 117
controller 87 blank pages Channel partners support
electrical components 79, 85 troubleshooting 117, 376 HP Channel Services Network
jam detection 79, 85 block diagram (CSN) 117
motor control 79, 85, 87 cross section 117, 204, 205 checklist
550-sheet paper tray cross-section 205 problems 117, 119
electrical components 81 external plug and port locations checklists
jam detection 83 117, 204, 225 pre-troubleshooting 117, 150,
paper pickup 82 printed circuit assembly (PCA) 151
550-sheet tray connector locations 117, 204, circuit diagrams 117, 204, 242
controller 81 205, 217 high-voltage power supply 1, 25
electrical components 79, 80 sensors and switches 117, 204, low-voltage power supply 1, 21
jam detection 79, 80 205 clean the paper path
motor control 79, 80, 81 browser requirements cleaning page printing 117, 320
550-sheet trays HP Embedded Web Server 117, cleaning
jams 333 254 glass (M527/M528) 320
mode 117
A C paper path 117, 297, 298, 320
AC to DC conversion 1, 21 cables printer 117, 320
accessories installed, information USB, troubleshooting 117, 376 rollers document feeder (M527/
117, 254, 255, 257 calibrate M528) 320
acoustic specifications 409, 412 colors 297, 298 tray 1 rollers and separation pad
auto on / auto off mode Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control 117, 320
setup and operation 6 panel 117 tray 2-X rollers 117, 320
auto on / auto off mode (M501) calibration functions 51 cleaning page 117
setup and operation 1 cartridge clutches
automatic document feeder dynamic security 47 DC controller 1, 11, 17
scanning and image capture (M776 life detection 1, 33, 45, 46 cold reset 117, 382
only) 108 memory chip 1, 33, 45, 46 color options
changing, Windows 297
ENWW Index 419

color theme HCI tray 95 DC controller communication error
changing, Windows 297 inner finisher 103 55.WX.YZ error 117
colors conventions used 1 DC controller firmware error
calibrate 297, 298 cooling 70.WX.YZ error 117
component test areas and fans 1, 11, 16 DC motors 1, 11, 13
special mode test 117, 186, 202 counts 117, 382 DC voltages converted from AC 1, 21
components copy scan 117 decoding
2x550-sheet tray 79, 85 document feeder 117 message 117
550-sheet tray 79, 80 document feeder duplex 117 default settings, restoring
DC controller 1, 11 document feeder roller clean NVRAM initialization 117
diagnostic tests 117, 186, 202 117 defaults
engine-control system 1, 10 document feeder roller interval restoring 117
fuser 1, 28 117 defeating
HCI 79 document feeder simplex 117 interlocks 117, 186, 192, 193
HCI tray 93 engine cycles 117, 382 delivery
paper feeder 1 fax scan 117 inner finisher 105
paper handling 52 flatbed cycle 117 determine problem source 117, 150,
pickup, feed, and delivery 1 page, reset 117, 382 151
toner cartridge 1, 33, 45 refurbish cycle 117, 382 determine the installed revision of
configuration pages reset after replacing formatter firmware 117, 402, 403
information 117, 254, 255, 257 117, 382 development process 1, 33, 35, 41
printing 117, 254, 255 send scan 117 diagnostics
connections See also pages counts; pages component 117, 186, 202
1x550-sheet paper feeder counts engine 117, 186, 192
controller PCA 204, 205, 217 CPMD LED 117, 186, 187
DC controller 117, 204, 205, 217 error codes 291 networks 117
connector error CPMP diagrams
65.WX.YZ error 117 WISE 293 block 117, 204
control functions CPU 1, 8 circuit 117, 204, 242
fuser 1, 28, 30 cross section DC controller connections 117,
control panel 1, 8 block diagram 117, 204, 205 204, 205, 217
blank display 156 cross-section formatter connectors 117, 204,
button test 117 block diagram 205 217
connections diagram 117, 204, current settings pages 117, 119 formatter connectors (M506)
205, 217 117
CPMD 117 D formatter connectors) 205
display test 117 date main assemblies (printer base)
LED test 117 codes for firmware 117, 254, 117, 204, 227
menus 117 255, 257 motor and fans 117, 204, 227
control panel diagnostic flowcharts product first used 117, 382 printed circuit assemblies (PCAs;
150 DC controller printer base) 117, 204, 227
control panel diagnostic flowcharts clutches 1, 11, 17 rollers and pads (printer base)
(M856/E85055/M776) 159, 180 components 1, 11 117, 204, 227
control panel menus 259 connections, diagrams 117, 204, timing 117, 204, 241
control panel message document 205, 217 digital sending error (firmware)
WISE, search 291 fans 1, 11, 16 44.WX.YZ error 117
control-panel menus 117 motors 1, 11, 13 dimensions, printer 409
controller sensors 1, 11, 18 dimensions, printer E75245 409
2x550-sheet tray 87 solenoids 1, 11, 17 dimensions, printer M751 409
550-sheet tray 81 switches 1, 11, 17
420 Index ENWW

document feeder engine fan error
automatic document feeder (M776 diagnostics 117, 186, 192 58.WX.YZ error 117
only) 108 test page 117, 186, 192 fans
jams 117, 338 engine error (LaserJet) connections diagram 117, 204,
paper-feeding problems (M527) 46.WX.YZ error 117 205, 217
117 63.WX.YZ error 117 DC controller 1, 11, 16
paper-feeding problems (M527/ engine power supply exhaust 1, 11, 16
M528) 326 connections diagram 117, 204, intake 1, 11, 16
document feeder count 205, 217 fax problems
document feeder pages 117 engine-control system get help from WISE 408
document feeder error components 1, 10 firmware
31.WX.YZ error 117 envelope feeder date codes 117, 254, 255, 257
document feeder kit interval 117 connections diagram 117, 204, firmware communication error
document feeder rollers (M527/M528) 205, 217 49.WX.YZ error 117
cleaning 320 error firmware install error
documentation, printer error codes fault 117 99.WX.YZ error 117
and messages error codes 291 hard disk error 117
WISE 293 CPMD 291 remote firmware upgrade error
drum cleaning 1, 33, 35, 44 error log 117
duplex printing accessory information 117, 255, 257 firmware version 117
connections diagram 117, 204, error log (M501) firmware, downloading new 117,
205, 217 information 254 402
duplexer event log 117, 119, 125 firmware, downloading new M501)
jams 333 clear 117, 119, 382 117
duplexer error clear using control panel 125 flatbed
69.WX.YZ error 117 clear using LCD control panel 117 scanning and image capture (M776
duplexing unit clear using touchscreen control only) 114
motors 1, 11, 13 panel 126 flowcharts
dynamic security error codes 291 troubleshooting 117, 150, 151,
toner cartridge 47 information 117, 254, 255, 257 152
event log error (firmware) formatter
E 42.WX.YZ error 117 connections diagram 117, 204,
economode exhaust fans 1, 11, 16 205, 217
check 117 Explorer, versions supported resets after replacing 117, 382
EconoMode setting 297 HP Embedded Web Server 117, formatter connectors
electrical components 254 diagrams 117, 205, 217
2x550-sheet paper tray 88 external plug and port locations formatter connectors (M501)
550-sheet paper tray 81 block diagram 117, 204, 225 diagrams 204
HCI paper tray 96 formatter control system 1, 6
inner finisher 104 F formatter lights 117, 186, 187, 188
electrical specifications 409, 412 factory defaults, restoring functional blocks
email problems NVRAM initialization 117 paper handling system 52
get help from WISE 408 failure detection fuser 1
Embedded Jetdirect error laser scanner 34 clearing jams 117
80.WX.YZ error 117 laser/scanner 1, 33 components 1, 28
embedded web server 117, 402, low-voltage power supply 21, 24 connections diagram 117, 204,
404 motors 1, 11, 13 205, 217
Embedded Web Server (EWS) failure detection (M506/M527) control functions 1, 28, 30
features 117, 254 low-voltage power supply 1 control-circuit function 1, 28
identification 28, 31
ENWW Index 421

identification (M506/M527) 1 HP Channel Services Network (CSN) pre-exposure 39
jams 333 Channel partners support 117 primary charging 1, 33, 35, 40
life detection 28, 31 HP Device Toolbox, using 117 primary transfer process 1, 33,
life detection (M506/M527) 1 HP Device Toolbox, using (M501) 35, 41
temperature protection 1, 28, 31 254 secondary transfer process 42
See also fusing and delivery unit HP embedded Jetdirect page 117, separation process 1, 33, 35, 42
fuser error 254, 255, 256 image-information process 1, 33, 35
41.WX.YZ error 117 HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) imaging drum 45
laser scanner error 117 features 117, 254 individual component diagnostics
paper path error 117 HP EWS, using 117 117, 186
fuser error (LaserJet) HP EWS, using (M501) 254 initial rotation period 1, 3
50.WX.YZ error 117 HP internal users initialization
fuser test page WISE 1, 117 NVRAM 117
print 117, 254 HP Jetdirect print server inner finisher
fusing process 1, 33, 35, 43 configuration page 117, 254, controller 103
255, 256 delivery operation 105
G lights 117, 186, 187, 188 electrical components 104
glass (M527/M528), cleaning 320 NVRAM initialization 117 jam detection 107
guide, print-quality troubleshooting HVPS (high-voltage power supply) motor control 103
117, 315 bias generation 1, 25 input accessory error
circuits 1, 25 67.WX.YZ error 117
H operations 1, 25 input/output error
hard disk partition error 40.WX.YZ error 117
98.WX.YZ error 117 I input/output interfaces 1, 8
hardware integration pocket (HIP) is I/O interfaces 1, 8 installation
not functioning 117, 150, 159, image capture system date calculation 117, 382
180, 183 scanning (M776 only) 114 verify for optional accessories
HCI image defects, product specific 117, 117, 254, 255
electrical components 79 315 intake fans 1, 11, 16
jam detection 79 image defects, repetitive ruler 117, interlocks
motor control 79 315, 316 defeating 117, 186, 192, 193
HCI paper tray image quality intermediate transfer belt
electrical components 96 check paper and the printing operations 50
jam detection 98 environment 117 secondary transfer roller
paper pickup 96 check toner-cartridge status 117, functions 50, 51
HCI tray 297, 298, 301 intermediate transfer belt (ITB) 50
controller 95 inspect the toner cartridge 117 internal diagnostics error
electrical components 93 tray 1 rollers and separation pad, 90.WX.YZ error 117
jam detection 93 clean 117, 320 video display error 117
motor control 93, 95 tray 2-X rollers, clean 117, 320 Internet Explorer, versions supported
heartbeat LED 117, 186, 187, 188 image quality issues HP Embedded Web Server 117,
heaters examples and solutions 117, 315 254
fuser 1, 28 image-formation process IPv4 information 117, 254, 255, 256
high-voltage power supply (HVPS) development process 1, 33, 35, IPv6 information 117, 254, 255, 256
bias generation 1, 25 41 ITB 50
circuits 1, 25 drum cleaning 1, 33, 35, 44 operations 50
operations 1, 25 fusing process 1, 33, 35, 43 secondary transfer roller
home button is unresponsive 150, ITB cleaning process 43 functions 50, 51
159, 180, 182 laser-beam exposure 1, 33, 35, ITB cleaning process 43
40
422 Index ENWW

J laser scanner error (LaserJet) main assemblies (printer base)
jam error (LaserJet) 51.WX.YZ error 117 block diagram 117, 204, 227
13.WX.YZ error 117 52.WX.YZ error 117 manual print modes 117
jam error (PageWide) laser-beam exposure 1, 33, 35, 40 Memory 9
13.WX.YZ error 117 laser/scanner memory
jams failure detection 1, 33 NVRAM initialization 117
2 x 550 paper trays 333 operations 1, 33 toner cartridge 1, 33, 45, 46
550-sheet trays 333 safety 1, 33, 34 Memory Enhancement technology
auto-navigation 117, 333, 338 laser/scanner assembly (MEt) 1, 6, 9
causes of 117, 333, 338 connections diagram 117, 204, memory error
detection in 2x550-sheet paper 205, 217 82.WX.YZ error 117
tray 90 last rotation period 1, 3 EMMC error 117
detection in 550-sheet paper latent image formation 1, 33, 35 hard disk error 117
tray 83 LDAP gateway menu
detection in HCI paper tray 98 validating (M527) 117 Administration menu 117
detection in inner finisher 107 LEDs Backup/Restore menu 117, 285
detection in trays 3-5 1 formatter lights 117, 186 Calibrate/Cleaning menu 117
diagnostic test for 117, 186, 195, LEDs, troubleshooting 117, 186 control panel, access 117
196 lights Copy Settings menu (M527) 117
document feeder 117, 338 formatter 117, 186, 187, 188 Display Settings menu 117
duplexer 117, 333 troubleshooting with 117, 186, Fax Settings menu (M527) 117
fuser 117, 333 187 General menu 261
high-capacity input paper trays link speed settings 117 General Settings menu 117
333 location HP Web Services 117
locations 333 setting 117 Job Log menu 289
output bin 117, 333 low-voltage power supply (LVPS) Job Storage menu 289
recovery 117 converted DC voltages 1, 21, 22 Maintenance menu 285
right door 333 failure detection 24 Manage Supplies menu 117, 276
sensor locations 117, 333 operations 1, 21 Manage Trays menu 117
sensors 117, 333 protection for components 1, 21, Network Settings menu 117
Tray 1 117, 333 23 Network Setup 117
Tray 2 117, 333 stops and interruptions 1, 21, 22 Networking menu 278
Jetdirect print server low-voltage power supply (LVPS) Print menu 259, 265
lights 117, 186, 187, 188 (M506/M527) Print Options menu 117
NVRAM initialization 117 failure detection 1 Print Settings menu 117
job accounting error (firmware) low-voltage power supply (LVPS)) Quick Forms 117
48.WX.YZ error 117 failure detection 21 Reports 117
job management error LVPS (low-voltage power supply) Reports menu 117, 259
(firmware) 117 converted DC voltages 1, 21, 22 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu
job pipeline error (firmware) 117 failure detection 24 (M527) 117
job parser error (firmware) operations 1, 21 Service 117
47.WX.YZ error 117 protection for components 1, 21, Service menu 117
printer calibration error 117 23 Settings menu 259, 261
stops and interruptions 1, 21, 22 General menu 261
K LVPS (low-voltage power supply) Manage Supplies menu 276
keyboard 1 (M506/M527) Networking menu 278
failure detection 1 Print menu 265
L Supplies menu 259, 282
laser scanner M Support Tools menu 259, 284
failure detection 34 M501; auto on / auto off mode 1 Backup/Restore menu 285
ENWW Index 423

Maintenance menu 285, 286, N pages
287 Near Field Communication error blank 117, 376
Service menu 286 81.WX.YZ error 117 not printing 117, 376
Troubleshooting menu 287 Bluetooth error 117 printing slowly 117, 376
USB Firmware Upgrade external I/O card error 117 pages count 117, 382
menu 286 internal EIO error 117 reset 117, 382
System Setup 117 wireless error 117 See also counts; counts
Trays menu 259, 282, 290 Netscape Navigator, versions paper
Troubleshooting menu 287 supported default size reset 117, 382
troubleshooting menu 117 HP Embedded Web Server 117, jam detection 1, 79, 83, 90, 98
USB Drive menu 289 254 jam detection, inner finisher 107
USB Firmware Upgrade menu network jams 117, 333, 338
117, 286 configuring 117 selecting 297, 298, 303
menu map 117, 119, 123, 124 Network Setup menu 117 stop in path for testing 117, 186,
menus, control panel networks 201
Calibrate/Cleaning 117 diagnostics 117 paper feeder
motor and fans HP embedded Jetdirect electrical components 1
block diagram 117, 204, 227 configuration page 117, 254, paper handling
motor control 255, 256 components 52
2x550-sheet tray 79, 85, 87 link speed settings 117 overview 52
550-sheet tray 79, 80, 81 wireless page 117, 254, 255 solve problems 117, 323
HCI 79 no control panel sound 150, 159, paper handling error (LaserJet)
HCI tray 93, 95 180, 181 56.WX.YZ error 117
inner finisher 103 note 1 paper jams
trays 3-5 1 NVRAM initialization 117 2 x 550 paper trays 333
motor error (LaserJet) 550-sheet trays 333
59.WX.YZ error 117 O document feeder 117, 338
motors operation duplexer 333
2x550-sheet paper tray 88 Sleep delay 6 fuser 333
2x550-sheet tray 79, 85 Sleep delay (M501) 1 high-capacity input paper trays
550-sheet paper tray 82 Sleep mode 6 333
550-sheet tray 79, 80 Sleep mode (M506/M527) 1 locations 333
connections diagram 117, 204, operation sequence 1, 3 output bin 333
205, 217 operations right door 333
DC controller 1, 11, 13 laser/scanner 1, 33 Tray 1 333
failure detection 1, 11, 13 toner cartridge memory 1, 33, Tray 2 333
HCI 79 45, 46 paper movement
HCI paper tray 96 output accessory error operation 1, 52
HCI tray 93 66.WX.YZ error 117 paper path
image-formation system 1, 52, output bin diagnostic test 117, 186, 195,
62 clear jams 333 196
inner finisher 105 clearing jams 117 printer 1, 52
paper feeder 1 over-current protection 1, 21, 23 stop movement for testing 117,
stepping 1, 11, 13 over-voltage protection 1, 21, 23 186, 201
movement of paper through printer. OXPd/Web kit error paper pickup
See pickup, feed, and delivery 45.WX.YZ error 117 2x550-sheet paper tray 88
multiple feed prevention 550-sheet paper tray 82
trays 3-5 1 P HCI paper tray 96
page error paper-path
21.WX.YZ error 117 test, sensors 117, 186, 195, 197
424 Index ENWW

password cartridge fine pitch banding 117, vertical streaks - high
Service menu PIN 117, 382 315 temperature/humidity 117,
PCA dark streaks (early in toner 315
inner finisher 103 cartridge life) 117, 315 water drop (condensation) 117,
periods of the operation sequence 1, density change 117, 315 315
3 developer defect 117, 315 wide-pitch banding 117, 315
pickup, feed, and delivery fine-pitch banding 117, 315 printed circuit assemblies (PCAs;
components 1 fuser blisters 117, 315 printer base)
overview 1 fuser contamination 117, 315 block diagram 117, 204, 227
PJL (printer job language) 1, 6, 7 graininess/fixing mottle 117, 315 printed circuit assembly (PCA)
PML (printer management hot fuser offset 117, 315 connector locations
language) 1, 6, 7 image placement - margins and block diagram 117, 204, 205,
power skew 117, 315 217
consumption 409, 412 impulse band (leading edge) 117, printer cold reset 117, 382, 387
power subsystem 117, 150, 154 315 printer dimensions
power supply 1, 21 impulse band (trailing edge) 117, E75245, M527/M528,
connections diagram 117, 204, 315 accessories 409
205, 217 IPG repeating defect 117, 315 printer job language (PJL) 1, 6, 7
troubleshooting 117, 150, 154, leading edge - mid-page toner printer management language
155 scatter 117, 315 (PML) 1, 6, 7
See also low-voltage power supply; OPC gear slip 117, 315 printer memory error
high-voltage power supply; low- OPC sharp bands (version 1) 117, 20.WX.YZ error 117
voltage power supply 315 printer resets 117, 382, 387
power-on troubleshooting overview OPC sharp bands (version 2) 117, printer space requirements 409, 411
117, 150, 154, 155, 156 315 printing
power-save mode. See sleep settings OPC wide-pitch banding 117, modes, manual 117
(M506/M527) 315 period in operation sequence 1,
powersave 117 output curl 117, 315 3
pre-boot menu options 117, 119, output stacking 117, 315 stop for testing 117, 186, 201
128 paper handling - jams 117, 315 troubleshooting 117, 376
pre-exposure process 39 paper handling - misprints 117, problem-solving
pre-troubleshooting checklist 117, 315 networks 117
150, 151 paper handling - multifeeds 117, Process Cleaning Page 117
primary charging process 1, 33, 35, 315
40 poor edge fixing - outside the Q
primary transfer processes 41 image assurance area 117, 315 Quick Forms menu 117
print quality poor edge fixing - within the image
built-in troubleshooting pages assurance area 117, 315 R
117 rain-toner attached to the OPC real-time clock error
check the paper-type setting for 117, 315 11.WX.YZ error 117
the print job 117 random missing toner 117, 315 repetitive image defect ruler 117,
manual print modes 117 right to left fade and banding 315, 316
test pages 117, 254 117, 315 reports
use a different software sticky output 117, 315 configuration page 117
program 117 toner in the leading edge margin default info page 117
Print Test Page 117 (fuser slap) 117, 315 demo page 117
print-quality troubleshooting 117, transfer issue - random voids error 117
315 117, 315 menu map 117
AC banding 117, 315 uneven Density - across the network summary 117
page 117, 315 PCL 6 font list 117
ENWW Index 425

PCL font list 117 block diagram 117, 204, 205 sleep mode (M506/M527)
print quality page 117 connections diagram 117, 204, operation 1
PS font list 117 205, 217 sleep settings 6
service 117 DC controller 1, 11, 18 voltage too high during 21, 24
service page 117 diagnostic tests 117, 186, 195, sleep settings (M501) 1
supplies status page 117 197 sleep settings (M506/M527) 1
usage page 117 HCI 79 voltage too high during 1
resets HCI paper tray 96 SMTP gateway
NVRAM initialization 117 HCI tray 93 validating (M527) 117
restore factory settings 117, 382, image-formation system 1, 33, solenoids
387 35 DC controller 1, 11, 17
restore the service ID 117, 382, 387, inner finisher 105 solve connectivity problems 117,
388 paper feeder 1 379
restoring paper handling system 52, 58 solve performance problems 117,
defaults 117 pickup, feed, and delivery 376
factory defaults 117 system 1 factors affecting print
restoring default settings tests, diagnostic sensor and paper performance 117, 376
NVRAM initialization 117 path 117, 186, 195 print speeds 117, 377
revision history iii tests, manual sensor 117, 186, printer does not print 378
right door 195, 199 printer does not print or it prints
jams 333 tests, manual tray/bin 117, 186, slowly 117
rollers and pads (printer base) 195 printer prints slowly 117, 378
block diagram 117, 204, 227 separation process 1, 33, 35, 42 solve problems 117
serial number 117, 382 inner finisher adjustments 328
S service and support output is curled or wrinkled 117,
safety WISE 1, 117 323, 324
laser/scanner 1, 33, 34 service and support information 1 paper does not feed
scanner (M527/M528) WISE and CSN 117 automatically 117, 323, 326
glass cleaning 320 Service ID paper does not feed from Tray 2-
scanner error convert to date 117, 382 X 117, 323, 324
30.WX.YZ error 117 restore 117, 382 paper handling 117, 323
scanner settings 117 Service menu 117 printer does not pick up paper
scanning service menu 117 117, 323, 326
image capture (M776 only) 114 secondary 117 printer does not pick up paper or
secondary service menu 117 Service menu options 117, 382 misfeeds 117, 323, 326
secondary transfer processes 42 service menu settings 117 printer feeds incorrect page size
secondary transfer roller functions cleaning mode 117 117, 323
51 powersave 117 printer picks up multiple sheets of
security error restoring defaults 117 paper 117, 323, 326
33.WX.YZ error 117 service mode functions 117, 382 printer pulls from incorrect tray
security settings information 117, service page 117 117, 323
254, 255, 256 settings printer will not duplex or duplexes
sensor error restore factory 117, 382, 387 incorrectly 117, 323, 324
54.WX.YZ error 117 sleep delay solving
58.WX.YZ error 117 operation 6 direct-connect problems 117,
sensors sleep delay (M501) 379
2x550-sheet paper tray 88 operation 1 space requirements, printer 409,
2x550-sheet tray 79, 85 sleep mode 411
550-sheet paper tray 82 operation 6
550-sheet tray 79, 80
426 Index ENWW

specifications manual sensor tests 117, 186, Tray 2
electrical and acoustic 409, 412 195, 199 clearing jams 117
space requirements 409, 411 networks 117 jams 333
standby period 1, 3 paper path 117, 186, 195, 196 tray 2-X rollers
stepping motors 1, 11, 13 paper path and sensor cleaning 117, 320
stop printing for test 117, 186, 201 diagnostic 117, 186, 195 tray motor error (LaserJet)
sub-voltage paper-path sensors 117, 186, 60.WX.YZ error 117
low-voltage power supply circuit 195, 197 tray selection - use requested tray
1, 21, 22 tray/bin manual sensor 117, 117
supplies error (LaserJet) 186, 195 trays 3-5
10.WX.YZ error 117 theory of operations 1 cassette lift operation 1
supplies error (PageWide) thermistors motor control 1
17.WX.YZ error 117 fuser 1, 28 multiple feed prevention 1
switches thermoswitch tray presence detection 1
2x550-sheet paper tray 88 fuser 28 trays 3-6
2x550-sheet tray 79, 85 thermoswitches jam detection 1
550-sheet paper tray 82 fuser 1, 28 troubleshooting 117
550-sheet tray 79, 80 timing chart 117, 204, 241 blank pages 117, 376
block diagram 117, 204, 205 tip 1 check paper and the printing
connections diagram 117, 204, toner environment 117
205, 217 image formation, use during 1, check the paper-type setting for
DC controller 1, 11, 17 33, 35 the print job 117
HCI 79 toner cartridge check toner-cartridge status 117,
HCI paper tray 96 diagnostic test 117, 186, 192 297, 298, 301
HCI tray 93 dynamic security 47 checklist 117, 119, 150, 151
inner finisher 105 life detection 1, 33, 45, 46 clean the paper path 117, 320
paper feeder 1 memory chip 1, 33, 45, 46 configuration pages for 117,
paper handling system 52, 58 presence detection 1, 33, 45, 46 254, 255
pickup, feed, and delivery toner level detection 1, 33, 45, control panel checks 117, 150,
system 1 46 159
system error (LaserJet) toner cartridge) direct-connect problems 117,
62.WX.YZ error 117 diagnostic test 194 379
system requirements toner cartridges 1, 33, 45 flowchart 117, 150, 151, 152
HP Embedded Web Server 117, components 1, 33, 45 inspect the toner cartridge 117
254 error conditions 1, 33, 45 jams 117, 333, 338
System Setup menu 117 operations 1, 33, 45 LED diagnostics 117, 186
touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no lights, using 117, 186, 187
T image) 150, 159, 180 network problems 117, 379, 380
TCP/IP information 117, 254, 255, touchscreen control panel 1 NVRAM initialization 117
256 touchscreen has an unresponsive pages not printing 117, 376
temperature zone 150, 159, 180 pages printing slowly 117, 376
fuser heater protection 1, 28, 31 transfer processes 1, 33, 35 power 117, 150, 154, 155
test pages tray print density, economode 117
fuser 117, 254 lift operation 1 print from a different software
tests Tray 1 program 117
component tests list and clearing jams 117 print quality 117
descriptions 117, 186, 202 jams 333 process 117, 150
disable cartridge check 117, 186, tray 1 rollers and separation pad USB cables 117, 376
192, 194 cleaning 117, 320 wired network 117, 379, 380
engine 117, 186, 192
ENWW Index 427

U HP internal users and Channel
understand lights on the formatter partners 1, 117
formatter lights 117, 186, 187, Web-based Interactive Search
188 Engine 117
understand the lights on the formatter Wise
heartbeat LED 117, 187, 188 control panel message
HP Jetdirect LEDs 117, 186, 187, document 291
188
understand the lights on the formatter
(M506/M507, M527/M528)
heartbeat LED 188
upgrade firmware 117, 402, 404
upgrades, downloading product
firmware 117, 402
upgrades, downloading product
firmware M501) 117
USB flash drive
firmware upgrade, control panel
117, 402, 404, 407
firmware upgrade, pre-boot
menu 117, 402, 404, 405
USB port
troubleshooting 117, 376
Use Requested Tray 117
W
waiting period 1, 3
warning 1
warranty date information 117, 382
Web browser requirements
HP Embedded Web Server 117,
254
Web-based Interactive Search Engine
WISE 117
Web-based Interactive Search Engine
(WISE)
HP internal users and Channel
partners 1, 117
weight, printer 409
weight, printer E75245 409
weight, printer M751 409
wireless
configuration page 117, 254,
255
wireless page 117, 254, 255
WISE
CPMD 293
email problems 408
fax problems 408
428 Index ENWW

HP CLJ m751 m856 E75245 E85055 MFP m776 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP CLJ m751 m856 E75245 E85055 MFP m776 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP Color LaserJet Enterprise M751, M856

HP Color LaserJet Managed E75245, E85055

Service Manual: Troubleshooting

© Copyright 2019 HP Development Company, Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®, and

The only warranties for HP products and

Table -1 Revision history

2 11/2019 Added the Solve fax or email problems chapter.

● Solve fax or email problems on page 408

2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Firmware upgradeschapter.

● Firmware upgrades on page 402

2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Service mode functionschapter.

● Service mode functions on page 382

● Internal test and information pages on page 254

● Diagrams on page 204

2 11/2019 Added touchscreen menu instructions in the Component tests chapter.

● Component tests on page 202

2 11/2019 Added the Print/stop test chapter.

● Print/stop test on page 201

● Paper path and sensor diagnostic tests on page 195

● Control panel checks on page 159

● Pre-boot menu options on page 128

● Print the event log on page 125

● Print the Settings menu map on page 123

Revision number Revision date Revision notes

● Use the solve problems checklist on page 119

● Paper path jam sensor locations on page 333

● Open the service menu from an LCD control panel (M751/E75245)

● Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1) on page 340

● Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) on page 343

● Clear jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF) on page 348

● Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1) on page 352

● Clear jams in the duplex area (13.D3) on page 353

● Document feeder system (M776) on page 108

● Scanning and image capture system (M776) on page 114

● Inner finisher on page 102

● Feed speed control on page 69

● Jam detection on page 71

iv Revision history ENWW

Revision number Revision date Revision notes

● Paper handling functional blocks on page 52

● Photo sensors and switches on page 58

● Motors, clutches, and solenoids on page 62

● Engine-control system on page 10

● Photointerrupter sensors on page 18

1 Theory of operations ................................................................................................................................................................................ 1

2 Solve problems ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 117

Appendix A Printer specifications ......................................................................................................................................................... 409

Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 419

Learn about the printer theory of operations.

● Conventions used in this guide

● HP service and support

● Engine laser scanner system

● Paper handling system

● Document feeder system (M776)

● Scanning and image capture system (M776)

Conventions used in this guide

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

HP service and support

Additional service and support for channel partners

1. Select Services & Support, and then select Services Delivery.

2. Select Technical Support, and then select Technical Documentation.

Find information about the following topics